RER615 Technical Manual
RER615 Technical Manual
RER615 Technical Manual
Grid Automation
Recloser Protection and Control RER615
Technical Manual
Document ID: 1MRS757817
Issued: 2015-03-06
Revision: C
Product version: 1.1
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/
or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby
requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and
information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure
network. It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network
administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the
necessary measures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application
of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs,
etc.) to protect the product and the network, its system and interface included,
against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion,
leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB is not liable for any such damages
and/or losses.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC
directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low
voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international
standards of the IEC 60255 series.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................19
This manual......................................................................................19
Intended audience............................................................................19
Product documentation.....................................................................20
Product documentation set..........................................................20
Document revision history...........................................................20
Related documentation................................................................21
Symbols and conventions.................................................................21
Symbols.......................................................................................21
Document conventions................................................................22
Functions, codes and symbols....................................................22
Function block.............................................................................62
Functionality................................................................................62
Fault records.....................................................................................64
Non-volatile memory.........................................................................69
Binary input.......................................................................................69
Binary input filter time..................................................................69
Binary input inversion..................................................................70
Oscillation suppression................................................................70
Binary outputs...................................................................................71
Power output contacts ................................................................71
Dual single-pole power outputs PO1 and PO2.......................71
Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip
circuit supervision...................................................................72
Signal output contacts ................................................................73
Internal fault signal output IRF ..............................................73
Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module..........74
Signal outputs SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005............74
Signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3 in BIO0006 ....................75
GOOSE function blocks....................................................................76
GOOSERCV_BIN function block.................................................77
Function block........................................................................77
Functionality...........................................................................77
Signals....................................................................................77
GOOSERCV_DP function block..................................................77
Function block........................................................................77
Functionality...........................................................................77
Signals....................................................................................78
GOOSERCV_MV function block..................................................78
Function block........................................................................78
Functionality...........................................................................78
Signals....................................................................................78
GOOSERCV_INT8 function block...............................................79
Function block........................................................................79
Functionality...........................................................................79
Signals....................................................................................79
GOOSERCV_INTL function block...............................................79
Function block........................................................................79
Functionality...........................................................................80
Signals....................................................................................80
GOOSERCV_CMV function block...............................................80
Function block........................................................................80
Functionality...........................................................................80
Signals....................................................................................81
Monitored data.....................................................................151
Technical data......................................................................151
Technical revision history.....................................................152
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection
(F)DPHxPDOC..........................................................................153
Identification.........................................................................153
Function block......................................................................153
Functionality.........................................................................153
Operation principle ..............................................................153
Measurement modes............................................................158
Directional overcurrent characteristics ................................159
Application............................................................................167
Signals..................................................................................169
Settings................................................................................171
Monitored data.....................................................................175
Technical data......................................................................177
Technical revision history.....................................................177
Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and
distribution transformers T1PTTR.............................................178
Identification.........................................................................178
Function block......................................................................178
Functionality.........................................................................178
Operation principle...............................................................178
Application............................................................................181
Signals..................................................................................182
Settings................................................................................183
Monitored data.....................................................................183
Technical data......................................................................184
Technical revision history.....................................................184
Earth-fault protection......................................................................184
Non-directional earth-fault protection (F)EFxPTOC..................184
Identification.........................................................................184
Function block......................................................................185
Functionality.........................................................................185
Operation principle...............................................................185
Measurement modes............................................................187
Timer characteristics............................................................187
Application............................................................................190
Signals..................................................................................190
Settings................................................................................191
Monitored data.....................................................................194
Technical data......................................................................195
Technical revision history.....................................................196
Directional earth-fault protection (F)DEFxPDEF ......................196
Identification.........................................................................196
Function block......................................................................197
Functionality.........................................................................197
Operation principle...............................................................197
Directional earth-fault principles...........................................203
Measurement modes............................................................209
Timer characteristics............................................................210
Directional earth-fault characteristics...................................212
Application............................................................................220
Signals..................................................................................222
Settings................................................................................223
Monitored data.....................................................................227
Technical data......................................................................229
Technical revision history.....................................................230
Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF............230
Identification.........................................................................230
Function block......................................................................230
Functionality.........................................................................230
Operation principle...............................................................231
Application............................................................................235
Signals..................................................................................237
Settings................................................................................237
Monitored data.....................................................................238
Technical data......................................................................238
Technical revision history.....................................................239
Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM....................239
Identification.........................................................................239
Function block......................................................................239
Functionality.........................................................................239
Operation principle...............................................................240
Neutral admittance characteristics.......................................253
Application............................................................................259
Signals..................................................................................264
Settings................................................................................265
Monitored data.....................................................................266
Technical data......................................................................266
Harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC..................266
Identification.........................................................................266
Function block......................................................................267
Functionality.........................................................................267
Operation principle...............................................................267
Application............................................................................271
Signals..................................................................................272
Settings................................................................................273
Monitored data.....................................................................274
Technical data......................................................................274
Wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE................................274
Identification.........................................................................274
Function block......................................................................275
Functionality.........................................................................275
Operation principle...............................................................275
Timer characteristics............................................................280
Measurement modes............................................................282
Application............................................................................282
Signals..................................................................................284
Settings................................................................................284
Monitored data.....................................................................285
Technical data......................................................................286
Unbalance protection......................................................................286
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC................286
Identification.........................................................................286
Function block......................................................................287
Functionality.........................................................................287
Operation principle...............................................................287
Application............................................................................289
Signals..................................................................................290
Settings................................................................................290
Monitored data.....................................................................291
Technical data......................................................................291
Technical revision history.....................................................292
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC..............................292
Identification.........................................................................292
Function block......................................................................292
Functionality.........................................................................292
Operation principle...............................................................293
Application............................................................................294
Signals..................................................................................295
Settings................................................................................295
Monitored data.....................................................................296
Technical data......................................................................296
Voltage protection...........................................................................297
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV..........................297
Identification.........................................................................297
Function block......................................................................297
Functionality.........................................................................297
Operation principle...............................................................297
Timer characteristics............................................................301
Application............................................................................301
Signals..................................................................................302
Settings................................................................................303
Monitored data.....................................................................304
Technical data......................................................................304
Technical revision history.....................................................304
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV........................305
Identification.........................................................................305
Function block......................................................................305
Functionality.........................................................................305
Operation principle...............................................................305
Timer characteristics............................................................309
Application............................................................................309
Signals..................................................................................310
Settings................................................................................310
Monitored data.....................................................................311
Technical data......................................................................312
Technical revision history.....................................................312
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV..............................312
Identification.........................................................................312
Function block......................................................................312
Functionality.........................................................................313
Operation principle...............................................................313
Application............................................................................314
Signals..................................................................................315
Settings................................................................................315
Monitored data.....................................................................316
Technical data......................................................................316
Technical revision history.....................................................316
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV...............317
Identification.........................................................................317
Function block......................................................................317
Functionality.........................................................................317
Operation principle...............................................................317
Application............................................................................318
Signals..................................................................................319
Settings................................................................................319
Monitored data.....................................................................320
Technical data......................................................................320
Technical revision history.....................................................320
Positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV...............321
Identification.........................................................................321
Function block......................................................................321
Functionality.........................................................................321
Operation principle...............................................................321
Application............................................................................323
Signals..................................................................................324
Settings................................................................................324
Monitored data.....................................................................324
Technical data......................................................................325
Technical revision history.....................................................325
Frequency protection FRPFRQ......................................................325
Identification..............................................................................325
Function block...........................................................................326
Functionality..............................................................................326
Operation principle....................................................................326
Application.................................................................................332
Signals.......................................................................................333
Settings......................................................................................333
Monitored data...........................................................................334
Technical data...........................................................................334
Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC...............................................334
Identification..............................................................................334
Function block...........................................................................334
Functionality..............................................................................335
Operation principle....................................................................335
Application.................................................................................336
Signals.......................................................................................337
Settings......................................................................................337
Monitored data...........................................................................337
Technical data...........................................................................338
Functionality..............................................................................343
Operation principle....................................................................344
Application.................................................................................350
Signals.......................................................................................352
Settings......................................................................................352
Monitored data...........................................................................353
Technical data...........................................................................353
Technical revision history..........................................................353
Master trip TRPPTRC.....................................................................353
Identification..............................................................................353
Function block...........................................................................354
Functionality..............................................................................354
Operation principle....................................................................354
Application.................................................................................355
Signals.......................................................................................356
Settings......................................................................................357
Monitored data...........................................................................357
Technical revision history..........................................................357
Fault locator SCEFRFLO................................................................357
Identification..............................................................................357
Function block...........................................................................358
Functionality..............................................................................358
Operation principle....................................................................358
Phase Selection Logic..........................................................359
Fault impedance and distance calculation...........................360
Trigger detection..................................................................375
Alarm indication....................................................................376
Recorded data......................................................................377
Measurement modes............................................................377
Application.................................................................................378
Signals.......................................................................................379
Settings......................................................................................379
Monitored data...........................................................................381
Technical data...........................................................................383
Monitored data...........................................................................395
Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF...............................................395
Identification..............................................................................395
Function block...........................................................................395
Functionality..............................................................................396
Operation principle....................................................................396
Application.................................................................................399
Signals.......................................................................................400
Settings......................................................................................401
Monitored data...........................................................................401
Technical data...........................................................................402
Operation time counter MDSOPT...................................................402
Identification..............................................................................402
Function block...........................................................................402
Functionality..............................................................................402
Operation principle....................................................................403
Application.................................................................................404
Signals.......................................................................................404
Settings......................................................................................405
Monitored data...........................................................................405
Technical data...........................................................................405
Technical revision history..........................................................405
Voltage presence PHSVPR............................................................406
Identification..............................................................................406
Function block...........................................................................406
Functionality..............................................................................406
Operation principle....................................................................406
Application.................................................................................408
Signals.......................................................................................409
Settings......................................................................................409
Monitored data...........................................................................410
Technical data...........................................................................410
Technical data......................................................................446
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI................................447
Identification.........................................................................447
Function block......................................................................447
Signals..................................................................................447
Settings................................................................................447
Monitored data.....................................................................448
Technical data......................................................................448
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI................................449
Identification.........................................................................449
Function block......................................................................449
Signals..................................................................................449
Settings................................................................................449
Monitored data.....................................................................450
Technical data......................................................................450
Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU.........451
Identification.........................................................................451
Function block......................................................................451
Signals..................................................................................451
Settings................................................................................451
Monitored data.....................................................................452
Technical data......................................................................453
Disturbance recorder......................................................................453
Functionality..............................................................................453
Recorded analog inputs.......................................................453
Triggering alternatives..........................................................454
Length of recordings.............................................................455
Sampling frequencies...........................................................455
Uploading of recordings.......................................................456
Deletion of recordings..........................................................457
Storage mode.......................................................................457
Pre-trigger and post-trigger data..........................................457
Operation modes..................................................................458
Exclusion mode....................................................................458
Configuration.............................................................................459
Application.................................................................................460
Settings......................................................................................460
Monitored data...........................................................................463
Technical revision history..........................................................463
Functionality..............................................................................465
Operation principle....................................................................465
Application.................................................................................468
Signals.......................................................................................469
Settings......................................................................................470
Monitored data...........................................................................470
Technical revision history..........................................................470
Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI and earthing switch
indication ESSXSWI.......................................................................471
Identification..............................................................................471
Function block...........................................................................471
Functionality..............................................................................471
Operation principle....................................................................471
Application.................................................................................472
Signals.......................................................................................472
Settings......................................................................................473
Monitored data...........................................................................473
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN.............................473
Identification..............................................................................473
Function block...........................................................................474
Functionality..............................................................................474
Operation principle....................................................................474
Application.................................................................................481
Signals.......................................................................................483
Settings......................................................................................484
Monitored data...........................................................................485
Technical data...........................................................................485
Autoreclosing DARREC..................................................................486
Identification..............................................................................486
Function block...........................................................................486
Functionality..............................................................................486
Protection signal definition...................................................487
Zone coordination.................................................................487
Master and slave scheme....................................................488
Thermal overload blocking...................................................488
Operation principle....................................................................489
Signal collection and delay logic..........................................489
Shot initiation........................................................................493
Shot pointer controller..........................................................496
Reclose controller.................................................................497
Sequence controller.............................................................499
Protection coordination controller.........................................500
Circuit breaker controller......................................................501
Counters....................................................................................502
Application.................................................................................503
Shot initiation........................................................................504
Sequence.............................................................................508
Configuration examples........................................................509
Delayed initiation lines..........................................................512
Shot initiation from protection start signal............................514
Fast trip in Switch on to fault................................................514
Signals.......................................................................................515
Settings......................................................................................516
Monitored data...........................................................................518
Technical data...........................................................................519
Technical revision history..........................................................520
Application.................................................................................539
Signals.......................................................................................541
Settings......................................................................................542
Monitored data...........................................................................543
Technical data...........................................................................546
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB .........................................................546
Identification..............................................................................546
Function block...........................................................................546
Functionality..............................................................................547
Operation principle....................................................................547
Application.................................................................................552
Signals.......................................................................................553
Settings......................................................................................554
Monitored data...........................................................................554
Technical data...........................................................................555
Section 17 Glossary.......................................................................683
Section 1 Introduction
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.
Maintenance
Engineering
Planning &
Installation
Operation
purchase
Quick start guide
Quick installation guide
Brochure
Product guide
Operation manual
Installation manual
Connection diagram
Engineering manual
Technical manual
Application Engineering Guide
Communication protocol manual
IEC 61850 Engineering guide
Point list manual
GUID-7414985D-2433-46E4-B77B-CCE64F6FC8D0 V1 EN
Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle
1.4.1 Symbols
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.
• Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
• The example figures illustrate the IEC display variant.
• Menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.
The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
• IED input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier font.
When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE.
2.1 Overview
RER615 is a member of the Relion® product family. The relay has inherited
features from the 615 series relays that are characterized by their compactness as
well as environmentally friendly (RoHS compliance) and withdrawable-unit
design. Re-engineered from the ground up, the relays have been designed to
unleash the full potential of the IEC 61850 standard for communication and
interoperability between substation automation devices.
With RER615, grid reliability can be enhanced, ranging from basic, non-directional
overload protection to extended protection functionality with power quality
analyses. RER615 meets today’s requirements for smart grids and supports the
protection of overhead lines in isolated neutral, resistance-earthed, compensated
and solidly earthed networks. RER615 is freely programmable with horizontal
GOOSE communication, thus enabling sophisticated interlocking functions.
RER615 includes sophisticated protection functionality to detect, isolate and
restore power in all types of networks but especially in compensated networks
(including recloser tripping curves). As part of an ABB smart grid solution, the
relay provides superior fault location, isolation and restoration (FLIR) to lower the
frequency and shorten the duration of faults.
The adaptable standard configurations allow the relay to be taken into use right
after the application-specific parameters have been set, thus enabling rapid
commissioning. RER615 supports the same configuration tools as the other relays
in the Relion product family. The freely programmable relay contains six easily
manageable setting groups.
Via the relay's front panel HMI or a remote control system, one recloser can be
controlled. The relay's large, easy-to-read LCD screen with single-line diagram
offers local control and parametrization possibilities with dedicated push buttons
for safe operation. Easy Web-based parametrization tool is also available with
download possibility.
To protect the relay from unauthorized access and to maintain the integrity of
information, the relay is provided with a four-level, role-based user authentication
system, with individual passwords for the viewer, operator, engineer and
administrator levels. The access control system applies to the front panel HMI,
embedded Web browser-based HMI and Protection and Control IED Manager
PCM600. In addition, the relay also includes cyber security features such as audit
trail.
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the IED. The LHMI
comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.
RER615
Recloser closed
Recloser open
AR enabled/in progress
Unsuccessful reclosing
Recloser not ready
Condition monitoring
Overcurrent
Earth-fault
Hot line tag enabled
Battery OK or fail
GUID-AA3D2DB6-0A8D-45FA-AE5D-429A2318B4EE V2 EN
2.2.1 Display
The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports two character sizes. The
character size depends on the selected language. The amount of characters and
rows fitting the view depends on the character size.
3 4
A070705 V3 EN
1 Header
2 Icon
3 Content
4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)
2.2.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.
There are 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDs can be
configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI,
WHMI or PCM600.
2.2.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. With the push-buttons you can give open or close commands to
objects in the primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a
A071176 V1 EN
Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port
The WHMI allows secure access to the IED via a Web browser. The supported
Web browser versions are Internet Explorer 7.0, 8.0 and 9.0.
The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.
GUID-DC77F492-212C-496A-97DD-F5ECE1366F2B V2 EN
• Locally by connecting the laptop to the IED via the front communication port.
• Remotely over LAN/WAN.
2.4 Authorization
The user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each with
different rights and default passwords.
Audit trail events related to user authorization (login, logout, violation remote and
violation local) are defined according to the selected set of requirements from IEEE
1686. The logging is based on predefined usernames or user categories. The user
audit trail events are accessible with IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI.
PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events and process
related events. Audit trail events are visible through dedicated Security events
view. Since only the administrator has the right to read audit trail, authorization
must be used in PCM600. The audit trail cannot be reset but PCM600 Event
Viewer can filter data. Audit trail events can be configured to be visible also in LHMI/
WHMI Event list together with process related events.
To expose the audit trail events through Event list, define the
authority logging level parameter via Configuration/
Authorization/Authority logging. Notice that this exposes audit
trail events to all users.
2.5 Communication
The IED supports a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850, IEC
60870-5-101/IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus® and DNP3. Operational information and
controls are available through these protocols. However, some communication
functionality, for example, horizontal communication between the IEDs, is only
enabled by the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
The IED can simultaneously report events to four different clients on the station
bus. If PCM600 reserves one client connection, only three client connections are
left, for example, for IEC 61850 and Modbus.
All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated optional communication modules. The IED can be connected to Ethernet-
based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-TX) or the fibre-
optic LC connector (100Base-FX).
For the correct operation of redundant loop topology, it is essential that the external
switches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in the
switches. Otherwise, connecting the loop topology can cause problems to the
network. The IED itself does not support link-down detection or RSTP. The ring
recovery process is based on the aging of MAC addresses and link-up/link-down
events can cause temporary breaks in communication. For better performance of
the self-healing loop, it is recommended that the external switch furthest from the
IED loop is assigned as the root switch (bridge priority = 0) and the bridge priority
increases towards the IED loop. The end links of the IED loop can be attached to
the same external switch or to two adjacent external switches. Self-healing Ethernet
ring requires a communication module with at least two Ethernet interfaces for all
IEDs.
Client A Client B
Network A
Network B
GUID-283597AF-9F38-4FC7-B87A-73BFDA272D0F V3 EN
that the network is split into several rings with no more than 30
IEDs per ring.
1) In this case sensors, although the tools and documentation mention CTs
1) The U12 and UL1 VT connections are not an option although the tools and documentation mention them
1) The U12 and UL1 VT connections are not an option although the tools and documentation mention them
1) Used in the IEC main menu header and as part of the disturbance recording identification
3.2 Self-supervision
• Internal faults
• Warnings
An indication about the fault is shown as a message on the LHMI. The text
Internal Fault with an additional text message, a code, date and time, is
shown to indicate the fault type.
Different actions are taken depending on the severity of the fault. The IED tries to
eliminate the fault by restarting. After the fault is found to be permanent, the IED
stays in the internal fault mode. All other output contacts are released and locked
for the internal fault. The IED continues to perform internal tests during the fault
situation.
If an internal fault disappears, the green Ready LED stops flashing and the IED
returns to the normal service state. The fault indication message remains on the
display until manually cleared.
The self-supervision signal output operates on the closed circuit principle. Under
normal conditions the relay is energized and the contact gap 3-5 in slot X100 is
closed. If the auxiliary power supply fail or an internal fault is detected, the contact
gap 3-5 is opened.
A070789 V1 EN
The internal-fault code indicates the type of internal the IED fault. When a fault
appears, the code is to be recorded so that it can be reported to ABB customer service.
For further information on internal fault indications, see the operation manual.
3.2.2 Warnings
In case of a warning, the IED continues to operate except for those protection
functions possibly affected by the fault, and the green Ready LED remains lit as
during normal operation.
Warnings are indicated with the text Warning and the name of the warning, a
numeric code and the date and time on the LHMI. The warning indication message
can be manually cleared.
GUID-00339108-34E4-496C-9142-5DC69F55EE7A V1 EN
3.3.2 Functionality
The programmable LEDs reside on the right side of the display on the LHMI.
RER615
Recloser closed
Recloser open
AR enabled/in progress
Unsuccessful reclosing
Recloser not ready
Condition monitoring
Overcurrent
Earth-fault
Hot line tag enabled
Battery OK or fail
GUID-AA3D2DB6-0A8D-45FA-AE5D-429A2318B4EE V2 EN
All the programmable LEDs in the HMI of the IED have two colors, green and red.
For each LED, the different colors are individually controllable.
Each LED has two control inputs, ALARM and OK. The color setting is common for
all the LEDs. It is controlled with the Alarm color setting, the default value being
"Red". The OK input corresponds to the color that is available, with the default
value being "Green".
Changing the Alarm color setting to "Green" changes the color behavior of the OK
inputs to red.
("None", "OK", "Alarm") of each LED can also be read under a common
monitored data view for programmable LEDs.
The LED status also provides a means for resetting the individual LED via
communication. The LED can also be reset from configuration with the RESET input.
The resetting and clearing function for all LEDs is under the Clear menu.
The menu structure for the programmable LEDs is presented in Figure 10. The
common color selection setting Alarm colour for all ALARM inputs is in the
General menu, while the LED-specific settings are under the LED-specific menu
nodes.
Programmable LEDs
General Alarm color Red
Green
LED 1
Alarm mode
LED 2
Description
Follow-S
Follow-F
Latched-S
LatchedAck-F-S
The ALARM input behavior can be selected with the alarm mode settings from the
alternatives "Follow-S", "Follow-F", "Latched-S" and "LatchedAck-F-S". The OK
input behavior is always according to "Follow-S". The alarm input latched modes
can be cleared with the reset input in the application logic.
GUID-58B6C3F2-873A-4B13-9834-9BB21FCA5704 V1 EN
Activating
signal
LED
GUID-952BD571-874A-4572-8710-F0E879678552 V1 EN
Similar to "Follow-S", but instead the LED is flashing when the input is active, Non-
latched.
"Latched-S": Latched, ON
This mode is a latched function. At the activation of the input signal, the alarm
shows a steady light. After acknowledgement, the alarm disappears.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
GUID-055146B3-780B-43E6-9E06-9FD8D342E881 V1 EN
This mode is a latched function. At the activation of the input signal, the alarm
starts flashing. After acknowledgement, the alarm disappears if the signal is not
present and gives a steady light if the signal is present.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
GUID-1B1414BD-2535-40FA-9642-8FBA4D19BA4A V1 EN
3.3.3 Signals
Table 30: Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 1
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 1
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 1
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 2
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 2
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 2
Table continues on next page
3.3.4 Settings
Table 31: Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Alarm colour 1=Green 2=Red Colour for the alarm state of the LED
2=Red
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 1
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 1
Table continues on next page
LEDPTRC
OUT_START
OUT_OPERATE
OUT_ST_A
OUT_OPR_A
OUT_ST_B
OUT_OPR_B
OUT_ST_C
OUT_OPR_C
OUT_ST_NEUT
OUT_OPR_NEUT
GUID-B5D22C6D-951D-4F34-BE68-F5AF08580140 V1 EN
3.4.2 Functionality
The IED includes a global conditioning function LEDPTRC that is used with the
protection indication LEDs.
LED indication control is preconfigured in a such way that all the protection
function general start and operate signals are combined with this function
(available as output signals OUT_START and OUT_OPERATE). These signals are
always internally connected to Start and Trip LEDs. LEDPTRC collects and
combines phase information from different protection functions (available as
output signals OUT_ST_A /_B /_C and OUT_OPR_A /_B /_C). There is
also combined earth fault information collected from all the earth fault functions
available in the IED configuration (available as output signals OUT_ST_NEUT and
OUT_OPR_NEUT).
The IED has an internal real-time clock which can be either free-running or
synchronized from an external source. The real-time clock is used for time
stamping events, recorded data and disturbance recordings.
The IED is provided with a 48-hour capacitor back-up that enables the real-time
clock to keep time in case of an auxiliary power failure.
Setting Synch Source determines the method how the real-time clock is
synchronized. If set to “None”, the clock is free-running and the settings Date and
Time can be used to set the time manually. Other setting values activate a
communication protocol that provides the time synchronization. Only one
synchronization method can be active at a time but SNTP provides time master
redundancy.
The IED supports SNTP, IRIG-B, DNP3, Modbus and IEC 60870-5-101/104 to
update the real-time clock. IRIG-B with GPS provides the best accuracy, ±1 ms.
The accuracy using SNTP is +2...3 ms.
The IED can use one of two SNTP servers, the primary or the secondary server.
The primary server is mainly in use, whereas the secondary server is used if the
primary server cannot be reached. While using the secondary SNTP server, the IED
tries to switch back to the primary server on every third SNTP request attempt. If
both the SNTP servers are offline, event time stamps have the time invalid status.
The time is requested from the SNTP server every 60 seconds.
ABB has tested the IRIG-B with the following clock masters:
PROTECTION
BI_SG_2 SG_LOGIC_SEL
BI_SG_3 SG_1_ACT
BI_SG_4 SG_2_ACT
BI_SG_5 SG_3_ACT
BI_SG_6 SG_4_ACT
SG_5_ACT
SG_6_ACT
GUID-CF54A857-094E-4E79-A9F7-EE9DCAE9F139 V2 EN
3.6.2 Functionality
The IED supports six setting groups. Each setting group contains parameters
categorized as group settings inside application functions. The customer can
change the active setting group at run time.
The active setting group can be changed by a parameter or via binary inputs
depending on the mode selected with the Configuration/Setting Group/SG
operation mode setting.
The default value of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the
required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected. The setting group
selection is not dependent on the SG_x_ACT outputs.
For example, six setting groups can be controlled with three binary inputs. The SG
operation mode is set to “Logic mode 2” and inputs BI_SG_2 and BI_SG_5 are
connected together the same way as inputs BI_SG_3 and BI_SG_6.
The setting group 1 can be copied to any other or all groups from HMI (Copy
group 1).
The IED has the capacity to store the records of 128 latest fault events. Fault
records include fundamental or RMS current values. The records enable the user to
analyze recent power system events. Each fault record (FLTMSTA) is marked with
an up-counting fault number and a time stamp that is taken from the beginning of
the fault.
The fault recording period begins from the start event of any protection function
and ends if any protection function trips or the start is restored before the operate
event. If a start is restored without an operate event, the start duration shows the
protection function that has started first.
Start duration that has the value of 100% indicates that a protection function has
operated during the fault and if none of the protection functions has been operated,
Start duration shows always values less than 100%.
The Fault recorded data Protection and Start duration is from the same protection
function. The Fault recorded data operate time shows the time of the actual fault
period. This value is the time difference between the activation of the internal start
and operate signals. The actual operate time also includes the starting time and the
delay of the output relay.
The fault-related current, voltage, frequency, angle values, shot pointer and the
active setting group number are taken from the moment of the operate event, or
from the beginning of the fault if only a start event occurs during the fault. The
maximum current value collects the maximum fault currents during the fault. In
case frequency cannot be measured, nominal frequency is used for frequency and
zero for Frequency gradient and validity is set accordingly.
Measuring mode for phase current and residual current values can be selected with
the Measurement mode setting parameter.
In addition to the setting values, the IED can store some data in the non-volatile
memory.
• Up to 1024 events are stored. The stored events are visible in LHMI, WHMI
and Event viewer tool in PCM600.
• Recorded data
• Fault records (up to 128)
• Maximum demands
• Circuit breaker condition monitoring
• Latched alarm and trip LEDs' status
• Trip circuit lockout
• Counter values
1 2
4
5 5
GUID-13DA5833-D263-4E23-B666-CF38B1011A4B V1 EN
1 t0
2 t1
3 Input signal
4 Filtered input signal
5 Filter time
At the beginning, the input signal is at the high state, the short low state is filtered
and no input state change is detected. The low state starting from the time t0
exceeds the filter time, which means that the change in the input state is detected
and the time tag attached to the input change is t0. The high state starting from t1 is
detected and the time tag t1 is attached.
Each binary input has a filter time parameter Input # filter, where # is the number
of the binary input of the module in question (for example Input 1 filter).
When a binary input is inverted, the state of the input is TRUE (1) when no control
voltage is applied to its terminals. Accordingly, the input state is FALSE (0) when
a control voltage is applied to the terminals of the binary input.
The binary input is regarded as non-oscillating if the number of valid state changes
during one second is less than the set oscillation level value minus the set
oscillation hysteresis value. Note that the oscillation hysteresis must be set lower
than the oscillation level to enable the input to be restored from oscillation. When
the input returns to a non-oscillating state, the binary input is deblocked (the status
is valid) and an event is generated.
The IED provides a number of binary outputs used for tripping, executing local or
remote control actions of a breaker or a disconnector, and for connecting the IED
to external annunciation equipment for indicating, signalling and recording.
Power output contacts are used when the current rating requirements of the
contacts are high, for example, for controlling a breaker, such as energizing the
breaker trip and closing coils.
The contacts used for external signalling, recording and indicating, the signal
outputs, need to adjust to smaller currents, but they can require a minimum current
(burden) to ensure a guaranteed operation.
The IED provides both power output and signal output contacts. To guarantee
proper operation, the type of the contacts used are chosen based on the operating
and reset time, continuous current rating, make and carry for short time, breaking
rate and minimum connected burden. A combination of series or parallel contacts
can also be used for special applications. When appropriate, a signal output can
also be used to energize an external trip relay, which in turn can be confiugred to
energize the breaker trip or close coils.
All contacts are freely programmable, except the internal fault output IRF.
The power outputs are included in slot X100 of the power supply module.
X100
PO1
6
7
PO2
8
9
GUID-4E1E21B1-BEEC-4351-A7BE-9D2DBA451985 V1 EN
Figure 18: Dual single-pole power output contacts PO1 and PO2
3.10.1.2 Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision
The power outputs PO3 and PO4 are double-pole normally open/form A power
outputs with trip circuit supervision.
When the two poles of the contacts are connected in series, they have the same
technical specification as PO1 for breaking duty. The trip circuit supervision
hardware and associated functionality which can supervise the breaker coil both
during closing and opening condition are also provided. Contacts PO3 and PO4 are
almost always used for energizing the breaker trip coils.
X100
16
PO3
17
15
19
TCS1
18
20
22
PO4
21
23
TCS2 24
GUID-5A0502F7-BDC4-424A-BF19-898025FCCBD7 V1 EN
Figure 19: Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision
Power outputs PO3 and PO4 are included in the power supply module located in
slot X100 of the IED.
The signal output contacts are used for energizing, for example, external low
burden trip relays, auxiliary relays, annunciators and LEDs.
A single signal contact is rated for a continuous current of 5 A. It has a make and
carry for 0.5 seconds at 15 A.
When two contacts are connected in parallel, the relay is of a different design. It
has the make and carry rating of 30 A for 0.5 seconds. This can be applied for
energizing breaker close coil and tripping coil. Due to the limited breaking
capacity, a breaker auxiliary contact can be required to break the circuit.
X100
3
IRF
4
5
GUID-C09595E9-3C42-437A-BDB2-B20C35FA0BD2 V1 EN
X100
10
SO1
11
12
X100
13
SO2
14
GUID-83F96C39-652F-494A-A226-FD106568C228 V1 EN
Figure 21: Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module
The optional card BIO0005 provides the signal outputs SO1, SO2 SO3 and SO4.
Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual, parallel form C contacts; SO3 is a single
form C contact, and SO4 is a single form A contact.
X110
14
SO1
16
15
17
SO2
19
18
X110
20
SO3
22
21
23
SO4
24
GUID-CBA9A48A-2549-455B-907D-8261E2259BF4 V1 EN
BIO0006 module is provided with signal outputs SO1, SO2 (dual parallel/form C)
and SO3 (single/form C contact).
X130
10
SO1
12
11
13
SO2
15
14
X130
16
SO3
18
17
GUID-A87DF527-4194-4771-8FB8-BC91B1E788C6 V1 EN
GOOSE function blocks are used for connecting incoming GOOSE data to
application. They support BOOLEAN, Dbpos, Enum, FLOAT32, INT8 and INT32
data types.
Common signals
The VALID output indicates the validity of received GOOSE data, which means in
case of valid, that the GOOSE communication is working and received data quality
bits (if configured) indicate good process data. Invalid status is caused either by
bad data quality bits or GOOSE communication failure. See IEC 61850
engineering guide for details.
The OUT output passes the received GOOSE value for the application. Default
value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status. The IN input is defined
in the GOOSE configuration and can always be seen in SMT sheet.
Settings
The GOOSE function blocks do not have any parameters available in LHMI or
PCM600.
GUID-44EF4D6E-7389-455C-BDE5-B127678E2CBC V1 EN
3.11.1.2 Functionality
The GOOSERCV_BIN function is used to connect the GOOSE binary inputs to the
application.
3.11.1.3 Signals
Table 41: GOOSERCV_BIN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
GUID-63C0C3EE-1C0E-4F78-A06E-3E84F457FC98 V1 EN
3.11.2.2 Functionality
The GOOSERCV_DP function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary inputs
to the application.
3.11.2.3 Signals
Table 43: GOOSERCV_DP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Dbpos 00 Input signal
GUID-A59BAF25-B9F8-46EA-9831-477AC665D0F7 V1 EN
3.11.3.2 Functionality
3.11.3.3 Signals
Table 45: GOOSERCV_MV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN FLOAT32 0 Input signal
GUID-B4E1495B-F797-4CFF-BD19-AF023EA2D3D9 V1 EN
3.11.4.2 Functionality
3.11.4.3 Signals
Table 47: GOOSERCV_INT8 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN INT8 0 Input signal
GUID-241A36E0-1BB9-4323-989F-39668A7B1DAC V1 EN
3.11.5.2 Functionality
The OP output signal indicates that the position is open. Default value (0) is used if
VALID output indicates invalid status.
The CL output signal indicates that the position is closed. Default value (0) is used
if VALID output indicates invalid status.
The OK output signal indicates that the position is neither in faulty or intermediate
state. The default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status.
3.11.5.3 Signals
Table 49: GOOSERCV_INTL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Dbpos 00 Input signal
GUID-4C3F3A1A-F5D1-42E1-840F-6106C58CB380 V1 EN
3.11.6.2 Functionality
The MAG output passes the received GOOSE (amplitude) value for the
application. Default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status.
The ANG output passes the received GOOSE (angle) value for the application.
Default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status.
3.11.6.3 Signals
Table 51: GOOSERCV_CMV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
MAG_IN FLOAT32 0 Input signal
(amplitude)
ANG_IN FLOAT32 0 Input signal (angle)
GUID-E1AE8AD3-ED99-448A-8C11-558BCA68CDC4 V1 EN
3.11.7.2 Functionality
3.11.7.3 Signals
Table 53: GOOSERCV_ENUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Enum 0 Input signal
GUID-61FF1ECC-507D-4B6D-8CA5-713A59F58D5C V1 EN
3.11.8.2 Functionality
3.11.8.3 Signals
Table 55: GOOSERCV_INT32 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN INT32 0 Input signal
GUID-1999D6D9-4517-4FFE-A14D-08FDB5E8B9F6 V1 EN
3.12.1.2 Functionality
The QTY_GOOD function block evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and
passes it as a Boolean signal for the application.
The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (logic function
output, binary input, application function output or received GOOSE signal). Due
to application logic quality bit propagation, each (simple and even combined)
signal has quality which can be evaluated.
The OUT output indicates quality good of the input signal. Input signals that have
no quality bits set or only test bit is set, will indicate quality good status.
3.12.1.3 Signals
Table 57: QTY_GOOD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Any 0 Input signal
GUID-8C120145-91B6-4295-98FB-AE78430EB532 V1 EN
3.12.2.2 Functionality
The QTY_BAD function block evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and
passes it as a Boolean signal for the application.
The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (logic function
output, binary input, application function output or received GOOSE signal). Due
to application logic quality bit propagation, each (simple and even combined)
signal has quality which can be evaluated.
The OUT output indicates quality bad of the input signal. Input signals that have
any other than test bit set, will indicate quality bad status.
3.12.2.3 Signals
Table 59: QTY_BAD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Any 0 Input signal
GUID-B5FCAE66-8026-4D5F-AC38-028E5A8171BB V1 EN
3.12.3.2 Functionality
The outputs OK, WARNING and ALARM are extracted from the enumerated input
value. Only one of the outputs can be active at a time. In case the
GOOSERCV_ENUM function block does not receive the value from the sending
IED or it is invalid, the default value (0) is used and the ALARM is activated in the
T_HEALTH function block.
3.12.3.3 Signals
Table 61: T_HEALTH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Any 0 Input signal
GUID-F0F44FBF-FB56-4BC2-B421-F1A7924E6B8C V1 EN
3.12.4.2 Functionality
The function converts 32-bit floating type values to 8-bit integer type. The
rounding operation is included. Output value saturates if the input value is below
the minimum or above the maximum value.
3.12.4.3 Signals
Table 63: T_F32_INT8 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
F32 FLOAT32 0.0 Input signal
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
GUID-0FDC082E-C9A8-4B02-9878-6C49E44B7C0E V1 EN
3.12.5.2 Functionality
The OUT output indicates the communication status of the GOOSE function block.
When the output is in the true (1) state, the GOOSE communication is active. The
value false (0) indicates communication timeout.
3.12.5.3 Signals
Table 65: QTY_GOOSE_COMM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN 0 Input signal
3.12.6.1 Functionality
The T_DIR function evaluates enumerated data of the FAULT_DIR data attribute
of the directional functions. T_DIR can only be used with GOOSE. The DIR input
can be connected to the GOOSERCV_ENUM function block, which is receiving
the LD0.<function>.Str.dirGeneral or LD0.<function>.Dir.dirGeneral data attribute
sent by another IED.
In case the GOOSERCV_ENUM function block does not receive the value from
the sending IED or it is invalid , the default value (0) is used in function outputs.
The outputs FWD and REV are extracted from the enumerated input value.
3.12.6.2 Signals
Table 67: T_DIR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
DIR Enum 0 Input signal
Function block
GUID-9D001113-8912-440D-B206-051DED17A23C V1 EN
Functionality
OR and OR6 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean
variables.
The O output is activated when at least one input has the value TRUE. The default
value of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the required
number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.
Signals
Table 69: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Function block
GUID-7592F296-60B5-4414-8E17-2F641316CA43 V1 EN
Functionality
AND and AND6 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean
variables.
The default value in all inputs is logical true, which makes it possible to use only
the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.
Signals
Table 73: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
B1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
B2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Function block
GUID-9C247C8A-03A5-4F08-8329-F08BE7125B9A V1 EN
Functionality
The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with
Boolean variables.
The output signal is TRUE if the input signals are different and FALSE if they are
equal.
Signals
Table 77: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Function block
GUID-0D0FC187-4224-433C-9664-908168EE3626 V1 EN
Functionality
NOT is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.
Signals
Table 79: NOT Input signal
Name Type Default Description
I BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Function block
GUID-5454FE1C-2947-4337-AD58-39D266E91993 V1 EN
Functionality
The maximum function MAX3 selects the maximum value from three analog
values. Disconnected inputs and inputs whose quality is bad are ignored. If all
inputs are disconnected or the quality is bad, MAX3 output value is set to -2^21.
Signals
Table 81: MAX3 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 1
IN2 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 2
IN3 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 3
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Function block
GUID-40218B77-8A30-445A-977E-46CB8783490D V1 EN
Functionality
The minimum function MIN3 selects the minimum value from three analog values.
Disconnected inputs and inputs whose quality is bad are ignored. If all inputs are
disconnected or the quality is bad, MIN3 output value is set to 2^21.
Signals
Table 83: MIN3 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 1
IN2 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 2
IN3 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 3
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Function block
GUID-3D0BBDC3-4091-4D8B-A35C-95F6289E6FD8 V1 EN
Functionality
R_Trig is used as a rising edge detector.
R_Trig detects the transition from FALSE to TRUE at the CLK input. When the
rising edge is detected, the element assigns the output to TRUE. At the next
execution round, the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input.
Signals
Table 85: R_TRIG Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLK BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Function block
GUID-B47152D2-3855-4306-8F2E-73D8FDEC4C1D V1 EN
Functionality
F_Trig is used as a falling edge detector.
The function detects the transition from TRUE to FALSE at the CLK input. When
the falling edge is detected, the element assigns the Q output to TRUE. At the next
execution round, the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input.
Signals
Table 87: F_TRIG Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLK BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Function block
GUID-4548B304-1CCD-454F-B819-7BC9F404131F V1 EN
Functionality
The circuit breaker position information can be communicated with the IEC 61850
GOOSE messages. The position information is a double binary data type which is
fed to the POS input.
T_POS_CL and T_POS_OP are used for extracting the circuit breaker status
information. Respectively, T_POS_OK is used to validate the intermediate or
faulty breaker position.
Table 89: Cross reference between circuit breaker position and the output of the function block
Circuit breaker position Output of the function block
T_POS_CL T_POS_OP T_POS_OK
Intermediate '00' FALSE FALSE FALSE
Close '01' TRUE FALSE TRUE
Open '10' FALSE TRUE TRUE
Faulty '11' TRUE TRUE FALSE
Signals
Table 90: T_POS_CL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POS Double binary 0 Input signal
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Function block
GUID-63F5ED57-E6C4-40A2-821A-4814E1554663 V1 EN
Functionality
SWITCHR switching block for REAL data type is operated by the CTL_SW input,
selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs.
CTL_SW OUT
FALSE IN2
TRUE IN1
Signals
Table 96: SWITCHR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch
IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2
Function block
GUID-809F4B4A-E684-43AC-9C34-574A93FE0EBC V1 EN
Functionality
The Minimum pulse timer TPGAPC function contains two independent timers. The
function has a settable pulse length (in milliseconds). The timers are used for
setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the input is
activated, the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting.
GUID-8196EE39-3529-46DC-A161-B1C40224559F V1 EN
Figure 48: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is
longer than Pulse time setting
Signals
Table 98: Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
Settings
Table 100: TPGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pulse time 0...60000 ms 1 150 Minimum pulse time
Function block
GUID-F9AACAF7-2183-4315-BE6F-CD53618009C0 V1 EN
Functionality
The Minimum second pulse timer function TPSGAPC contains two independent
timers. The function has a settable pulse length (in seconds). The timers are used
for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the
input is activated, the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting.
GUID-8196EE39-3529-46DC-A161-B1C40224559F V1 EN
Figure 50: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is
longer than Pulse time setting
Signals
Table 101: Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
Settings
Table 103: TPSGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pulse time 0...300 s 1 0 Minimum pulse time
Function block
GUID-AB26B298-F7FA-428F-B498-6605DB5B0661 V1 EN
Functionality
The Minimum minute pulse timer function TPMGAPC contains two independent
timers. The function has a settable pulse length (in minutes). The timers are used
for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the
input is activated, the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting.
GUID-8196EE39-3529-46DC-A161-B1C40224559F V1 EN
Figure 52: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is
longer than Pulse time setting
Signals
Table 104: Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
Settings
Table 106: TPMGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pulse time 0...300 min 1 0 Minimum pulse time
GUID-2AA275E8-31D4-4CFE-8BDA-A377213BBA89 V1 EN
3.13.3.2 Functionality
The pulse timer function block PTGAPC contains eight independent timers. The
function has a settable pulse length. Once the input is activated, the output is set for
a specific duration using the Pulse delay time setting.
3.13.3.3 Signals
Table 107: PTGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 8 status
3.13.3.4 Settings
Table 109: PTGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pulse delay time 1 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 2 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 3 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 4 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 5 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 6 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 7 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 8 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
GUID-6BFF6180-042F-4526-BB80-D53B2458F376 V1 EN
3.13.4.2 Functionality
The time-delay-off function block TOFGAPC can be used, for example, for a drop-
off-delayed output related to the input signal. TOFGAPC contains eight
independent timers. There is a settable delay in the timer. Once the input is
activated, the output is set immediately. When the input is cleared, the output stays
on until the time set with the Off delay time setting has elapsed.
t0 t1 t1+dt t2 t3 t4 t5 t5+dt
3.13.4.3 Signals
Table 111: TOFGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 status
Table continues on next page
3.13.4.4 Settings
Table 113: TOFGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Off delay time 1 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 2 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 3 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 4 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 5 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 6 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 7 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 8 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
GUID-B694FC27-E6AB-40FF-B1C7-A7EB608D6866 V1 EN
3.13.5.2 Functionality
The time-delay-on function block TONGAPC can be used, for example, for time-
delaying the output related to the input signal. TONGAPC contains eight
independent timers. The timer has a settable time delay. Once the input is activated,
the output is set after the time set by the On delay time setting has elapsed.
t0 t0+dt t1 t2 t3 t4 t4+dt t5
dt = On delay time
GUID-B74EE764-8B2E-4FBE-8CE7-779F6B739A11 V1 EN
3.13.5.3 Signals
Table 115: TONGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5
Table continues on next page
3.13.5.4 Settings
Table 117: TONGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
On delay time 1 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 2 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 3 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 4 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 5 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 6 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 7 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 8 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
GUID-93136D07-FDC4-4356-95B5-54D3B2FC9B1C V1 EN
3.13.6.2 Functionality
The SRGAPC function block is a simple SR flip-flop with a memory that can be
set or that can reset an output from the S# or R# inputs, respectively. SRGAPC
contains eight independent set-reset flip-flop latches where the SET input has the
higher priority over the RESET input. The status of each Q# output is retained in
the nonvolatile memory. The individual reset for each Q# output is available on the
LHMI or through tool via communication.
3.13.6.3 Signals
Table 120: SRGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
S1 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q1 output when set
R1 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q1 output when set
S2 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q2 output when set
R2 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q2 output when set
S3 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q3 output when set
R3 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q3 output when set
S4 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q4 output when set
R4 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q4 output when set
S5 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q5 output when set
R5 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q5 output when set
S6 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q6 output when set
R6 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q6 output when set
S7 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q7 output when set
R7 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q7 output when set
S8 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q8 output when set
R8 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q8 output when set
3.13.6.4 Settings
Table 122: SRGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reset Q1 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q1 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q2 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q2 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q3 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q3 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q4 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q4 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q5 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q5 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q6 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q6 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q7 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q7 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q8 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q8 output when set
1=Reset
GUID-C79D9450-8CB2-49AF-B825-B702EA2CD9F5 V1 EN
3.13.7.2 Functionality
The move function block MVGAPC is used for user logic bits. Each input state is
directly copied to the output state. This allows the creating of events from
advanced logic combinations.
3.13.7.3 Signals
Table 123: MV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I1 BOOLEAN 0 I1 status
I2 BOOLEAN 0 I2 status
I3 BOOLEAN 0 I3 status
I4 BOOLEAN 0 I4 status
I5 BOOLEAN 0 I5 status
I6 BOOLEAN 0 I6 status
I7 BOOLEAN 0 I7 status
I8 BOOLEAN 0 I8 status
GUID-FA386432-3AEF-468D-B25E-D1C5BDA838E3 V2 EN
3.13.8.2 Functionality
Local/Remote control is by default realized through the R/L button on the front
panel. The control via binary input can be enabled by setting the value of the LR
control setting to "Binary input". The binary input control requires that the
CONTROL function is instantiated in the product configuration.
The actual Local/Remote control state is evaluated by the priority scheme on the
function block inputs. If more than one input is active, the input with the highest
priority is selected.
The actual state is reflected on the CONTROL function outputs. Only one output is
active at a time.
The station authority check based on the IEC 61850 command originator category
in control command can be enabled by setting the value of the Station authority
setting to "Station, Remote" (The command originator validation is performed only
if the LR control setting is set to "Binary input"). The station authority check is not
in use by default.
3.13.8.3 Signals
Table 126: CONTROL input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRL_OFF BOOLEAN 0 Control input OFF
CTRL_LOC BOOLEAN 0 Control input Local
CTRL_STA BOOLEAN 0 Control input Station
CTRL_REM BOOLEAN 0 Control input Remote
3.13.8.4 Settings
Table 128: Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
LR control 1=LR key 1=LR key LR control through LR key or binary input
2=Binary input
Station authority 1=Not used 1=Not used Control command originator category
2=Station, Remote usage
GUID-B1380341-22B1-4C7E-A57B-39DBBB9D7B92 V1 EN
3.13.9.2 Functionality
The Loc Rem restriction setting is used for enabling or disabling the restriction for
SPCGGIO to follow the R/L button state. If Loc Rem restriction is "True", as it is
by default, the local or remote control operations are accepted according to the R/L
button state.
Each of the 16 generic control point outputs has the Operation mode, Pulse length
and Description setting. If Operation mode is "Toggle", the output state is toggled
for every control request received. If Operation mode is "Pulsed", the output pulse
of a preset duration (the Pulse length setting) is generated for every control request
received. The Description setting can be used for storing information on the actual
use of the control point in application, for instance.
For example, if the Operation mode is "Toggle", the output O# is initially “False”.
The rising edge in IN# sets O# to “True”. The falling edge of IN# has no effect.
Next rising edge of IN# sets O# to “False”.
GUID-F0078144-A40B-4A72-915A-0E6665F8DEB1 V1 EN
The BLOCK input can be used for blocking the functionality of the outputs. The
operation of the BLOCK input depends on the Operation mode setting. If Operation
mode is "Toggle", the output state freezes and cannot be changed while the BLOCK
input is active. If Operation mode is "Pulsed", the activation of the BLOCK input
resets the outputs to the "False" state and further control requests are ignored while
the BLOCK input is active.
3.13.9.3 Signals
Table 130: SPCGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 16
3.13.9.4 Settings
Table 132: SPCGGIO Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Loc Rem restriction 0=False 1=True Local remote switch restriction
1=True
Operation mode 0=Pulsed 1=Toggle Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 1
Operation mode 0=Pulsed 1=Toggle Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 2
Operation mode 0=Pulsed 1=Toggle Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 3
Table continues on next page
GUID-94CA1296-83B4-4DFA-BF3B-7E649854687B V1 EN
3.13.10.2 Functionality
The remote control function block SPCRGGIO is dedicated only for remote
controlling, that is, SPCRGGIO cannot be controlled locally. The remote control is
provided through communications.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The function can be enabled
and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are
Enable and Disable.
SPCRGGIO has the Operation mode, Pulse length and Description settings
available to control all 16 outputs. By default, the Operation mode setting is set to
"Off". This disables the controllable signal output. SPCRGGIO also has a general
setting Loc Rem restriction, which enables or disables the local or remote state
functionality.
When the Operation mode is set to "Toggle", the corresponding output toggles
between "True" and "False" for every input pulse received. The state of the output
is stored in a nonvolatile memory and restored if the IED is restarted.
When the Operation mode is set to "Pulsed", the corresponding output can be used
to produce the predefined length of pulses. Once activated, the output remains
active for the duration of the set pulse length. When activated, the additional
activation command does not extend the length of pulse. Thus, the pulse needs to
be ended before the new activation can occur.
The Description setting can be used for storing signal names for each output.
The BLOCK input can be used for blocking the output functionality. The BLOCK
input operation depends on the Operation mode setting. If the Operation mode
setting is set to "Toggle", the output state cannot be changed when the input
BLOCK is TRUE. If the Operation mode setting is set to "Pulsed", the activation of
the BLOCK input resets the output to the FALSE state.
3.13.10.4 Signals
Table 133: SPCRGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
3.13.10.5 Settings
Table 135: SPCRGGIO Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Loc Rem restriction 0=False 1=True Local remote switch restriction
1=True
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCRGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 1
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCRGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 2
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCRGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 3
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCRGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 4
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCRGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 5
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCRGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 6
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCRGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 7
Table continues on next page
GUID-5F020DC8-4E60-44F6-A922-7D172AFE32FE V1 EN
3.13.11.2 Functionality
The local control function block SPCLGGIO is dedicated only for local
controlling, that is, SPCLGGIO cannot be controlled remotely. The local control is
done through the buttons in the front panel.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
SPCLGGIO has the Operation mode, Pulse length and Description settings
available to control all 16 outputs. By default, the Operation mode setting is set to
"Off". This disables the controllable signal output. SPCLGGIO also has a general
setting Loc Rem restriction, which enables or disables the local or remote state
functionality.
When the Operation mode is set to "Toggle", the corresponding output toggles
between "True" and "False" for every input pulse received. The state of the output
is stored in a nonvolatile memory and restored if the IED is restarted.
When the Operation mode is set to "Pulsed", the corresponding output can be used
to produce the predefined length of pulses. Once activated, the output remains
active for the duration of the set pulse length. When activated, the additional
activation command does not extend the length of pulse. Thus, the pulse needs to
be ended before the new activation can occur.
The Description setting can be used for storing signal names for each output.
Each control point or SPCLGGIO can only be accessed through the LHMI control.
SPCLGGIO follows the local or remote (L/R) state if the Loc Rem restriction
setting is "true". If the Loc Rem restriction setting is "false", local or remote (L/R)
state is ignored, that is, all controls are allowed regardless of the local or remote state.
The BLOCK input can be used for blocking the output functionality. The BLOCK
input operation depends on the Operation mode setting. If the Operation mode
setting is set to "Toggle", the output state cannot be changed when the input
BLOCK is TRUE. If the Operation mode setting is set to "Pulsed", the activation of
the BLOCK input resets the output to the FALSE state.
3.13.11.4 Signals
Table 136: SPCLGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
3.13.11.5 Settings
Table 138: SPCLGGIO Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Loc Rem restriction 0=False 1=True Local remote switch restriction
1=True
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCLGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 1
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCLGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 2
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCLGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 3
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCLGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 4
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCLGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 5
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCLGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 6
Table continues on next page
GUID-8BDF76AC-C4AE-43F1-98DF-B4942A21C45E V1 EN
3.13.12.2 Functionality
The function provides up-count and down-count status outputs, which specify the
relation of the counter value to a loaded preset value and to zero respectively.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
The operation of the multipurpose generic up-down counter can be described with
a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
GUID-9D9880AB-4CA7-4DD5-BA0C-C1D958FC04F6 V1 EN
Up-down counter
Each rising edge of the UP_CNT input increments the counter value CNT_VAL by
one and each rising edge of the DOWN_CNT input decrements the CNT_VAL by
one. If there is a rising edge at both the inputs UP_CNT and DOWN_CNT, the
counter value CNT_VAL is unchanged. The CNT_VAL is available in the
monitored data view.
The counter value CNT_VAL is stored in a nonvolatile memory. The range of the
counter is 0...+2147483647. The count of CNT_VAL saturates at the final value of
2147483647, that is, no further increment is possible.
The value of the setting Counter load value is loaded into counter value CNT_VAL
either when the LOAD input is set to "True" or when the Load Counter is set to
"Load" in the LHMI. Until the LOAD input is "True", it prevents all further counting.
The function also provides status outputs UPCNT_STS and DNCNT_STS. The
UPCNT_STS is set to "True" when the CNT_VAL is greater than or equal to the
setting Counter load value. DNCNT_STS is set to "True" when the CNT_VAL is zero.
The RESET input is used for resetting the function. When this input is set to "True"
or when Reset counter is set to "reset", the CNT_VAL is forced to zero.
3.13.12.4 Signals
Table 139: UDFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
UP_CNT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for up counting
DOWN_CNT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for down counting
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for counter
LOAD BOOLEAN 0=False Load input for counter
3.13.12.5 Settings
Table 141: UDFCNT Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Counter load value 0...2147483647 1 10000 Preset counter value
Reset counter 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets counter value
1=Reset
Load counter 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Loads the counter to preset value
1=Load
In case of configuration data loss or any other file system error that prevents the
IED from working properly, the whole file system can be restored to the original
factory state. All default settings and configuration files stored in the factory are
restored. For further information on restoring factory settings, see the operation
manual.
3.15.1 Functionality
The IED is provided with a load profile recorder. The load profile feature stores the
historical load data captured at a periodical time interval (demand interval). Up to
12 load quantities can be selected for recording and storing in a nonvolatile
memory. The value range for the recorded load quantities is about eight times the
nominal value, and values larger than that saturate. The recording time depends on
a settable demand interval parameter and the amount of quantities selected. The
record output is in the COMTRADE format.
3.15.1.1 Quantities
If the data source for the selected quantity is removed, for example,
with Application Configuration in PCM600, the load profile
recorder stops recording it and the previously collected data are
cleared.
The recording capability is about 7.4 years when one quantity is recorded and the
demand interval is set to 180 minutes. The recording time scales down
proportionally when a shorter demand time is selected or more quantities are
recorded. The recording lengths in days with different settings used are presented
in Table 144. When the recording buffer is fully occupied, the oldest data are
overwritten by the newest data.
The IED stores the load profile COMTRADE files to the C:\LDP\COMTRADE
folder. The files can be uploaded with the PCM600 tool or any appropriate
computer software that can access the C:\LDP\COMTRADE folder.
The load profile record consists of two COMTRADE file types: the configuration
file (.CFG) and the data file (.DAT). The file name is same for both file types.
To ensure that both the uploaded file types are generated from the same data
content, the files need to be uploaded successively. Once either of the files is
uploaded, the recording buffer is halted to give time to upload the other file.
0 A B B L D P 1 . C F G
0 A B B L D P 1 . D A T
GUID-43078009-323D-409C-B84A-5EB914CDEE53 V1 EN
The load profile record can be cleared with Reset load profile rec via HMI,
communication or the ACT input in PCM600. Clearing of the record is allowed
only on the engineer and administrator authorization levels.
The load profile record is automatically cleared if the quantity selection parameters
are changed or any other parameter which affects the content of the COMTRADE
configuration file is changed. Also, if data source for selected quantity is removed,
for example, with ACT, the load profile recorder stops recording and previously
collected data are cleared.
3.15.2 Configuration
The load profile record can be configured with the PCM600 tool or any tool
supporting the IEC 61850 standard.
The load profile record can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting under
the Configuration/Load Profile Record menu.
Each IED can be mapped to each of the quantity channels of the load profile
record. The mapping is done with the Quantity selection setting of the
corresponding quantity channel.
The IP number of the IED and the content of the Bay name setting
are both included in the COMTRADE configuration file for
identification purposes.
The memory consumption of load profile record is supervised, and indicated with
two signals MEM_WARN and MEM_ALARM, which could be used to notify the
customer that recording should be backlogged by reading the recorded data from
the IED. The levels for MEM_WARN and MEM_ALARM are set by two
parameters Mem.warn level and Mem. Alarm level.
3.15.3 Signals
Table 145: LDPMSTA Output signals
Name Type Description
MEM_WARN BOOLEAN Recording memory warning status
MEM_ALARM BOOLEAN Recording memory alarm status
3.15.4 Settings
Table 146: LDPMSTA Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Quantity Sel 1 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded
1=IL1
2=IL2
3=IL3
4=Io
9=U12
10=U23
11=U31
12=UL1
13=UL2
14=UL3
15=U12B
16=U23B
17=U31B
18=UL1B
19=UL2B
20=UL3B
21=S
22=P
23=Q
24=PF
4.1.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase non-directional FPHLPTOC 3I> 51P-1
overcurrent protection - Low stage
Three-phase non-directional PHHPTOC 3I>> 51P-2
overcurrent protection - High stage
Three-phase non-directional PHIPTOC 3I>>> 50P/51P
overcurrent protection - Instantaneous
stage
GUID-42271A6F-6299-4B1A-B55D-AC1A516BC662 V1 EN
4.1.1.3 Functionality
The function starts when the current exceeds the set limit. The operate time
characteristics for low stage FPHLPTOC and high stage PHHPTOC can be
selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT).The instantaneous stage PHIPTOC always operates with the DT
characteristic.
In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
A070552 V1 EN
Figure 70: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase
currents.
Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector reports the exceeding
of the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start
value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.
The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.
The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.
A070554 V1 EN
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.
If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"
causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.
The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.
The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.
The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
(F)PHxPTOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the
timer characteristics with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings.
When the DT characteristic is selected, it is only affected by the Operate delay
time and Reset delay time settings.
The IED provides 55 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the
special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. One user
programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable. In
addition to this, there are 39 curves for recloser applications. The DT
characteristics can be chosen by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI
Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both cases.
The timer characteristics supported by different stages comply with the list in the
IEC 61850-7-4 specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different
stages:
4.1.1.7 Application
When the setting is "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3", single-phase faults
are not detected. The setting "3 out of 3" requires the fault to be
present in all three phases.
Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. (F)PHxPTOC consists of three protection stages.
• Low FPHLPTOC
• High PHHPTOC
• Instantaneous PHIPTOC
FPHLPTOC is used for overcurrent protection. The function contains several types
of time-delay characteristics. PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC are used for fast clearance
of very high overcurrent situations.
The purpose is also to protect the transformer from short circuits occurring outside
the protection zone, that is through-faults. Transformer overcurrent protection also
provides protection for the LV-side busbars. In this case the magnitude of the fault
current is typically lower than 12xIn depending on the fault location and
transformer impedance. Consequently, the protection must operate as fast as
possible taking into account the selectivity requirements, switching-in currents, and
the thermal and mechanical withstand of the transformer and outgoing feeders.
A070978 V1 EN
The operating times of the main and backup overcurrent protection of the above
scheme become quite long, this applies especially in the busbar faults and also in
the transformer LV-terminal faults. In order to improve the performance of the
above scheme, a multiple-stage overcurrent protection with reverse blocking is
proposed. Figure 73 shows this arrangement.
successive overcurrent stages. With blocking channels, the operating time of the
protection can be drastically shortened if compared to the simple time selective
protection. In addition to the busbar protection, this blocking principle is applicable
for the protection of transformer LV terminals and short lines. The functionality
and performance of the proposed overcurrent protections can be summarized as
seen in the table.
Table 151: Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcurrent protection.
DT = definite time, IDMT = inverse definite minimum time
O/C-stage Operating char. Selectivity mode Operation speed Sensitivity
HV/3I> DT/IDMT time selective low very high
HV/3I>> DT blockable/time high/low high
selective
HV/3I>>> DT current selective very high low
LV/3I> DT/IDMT time selective low very high
LV/3I>> DT time selective low high
LV/3I>>> DT blockable high high
In case the bus-tie breaker is open, the operating time of the blockable overcurrent
protection is approximately 100 ms (relaying time). When the bus-tie breaker is
closed, that is, the fault current flows to the faulted section of the busbar from two
directions, the operation time becomes as follows: first the bus-tie relay unit trips
the tie breaker in the above 100 ms, which reduces the fault current to a half. After
this the incoming feeder relay unit of the faulted bus section trips the breaker in
approximately 250 ms (relaying time), which becomes the total fault clearing time
in this case.
A070980 V2 EN
The operating times of the time selective stages are very short, because the grading
margins between successive protection stages can be kept short. This is mainly due
to the advanced measuring principle allowing a certain degree of CT saturation,
good operating accuracy and short retardation times of the numerical units. So, for
example, a grading margin of 150 ms in the DT mode of operation can be used,
provided that the circuit breaker interrupting time is shorter than 60 ms.
levels along the protected line, selectivity requirements, inrush currents and the
thermal and mechanical withstand of the lines to be protected.
In many cases the above requirements can be best fulfilled by using multiple-stage
overcurrent units. Figure 74 shows an example of this. A brief coordination study
has been carried out between the incoming and outgoing feeders.
A070982 V1 EN
The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time selective
operation characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the
overcurrent protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a
coordination plan. In Figure 75, the coordination plan shows an example of
operation characteristics in the LV-side incoming feeder and radial outgoing feeder.
A070984 V2 EN
4.1.1.8 Signals
Table 152: FPHLPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
4.1.1.9 Settings
Table 158: FPHLPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling
the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in
IEC/ANSI IDMT
curves
Table continues on next page
Characteristic Value
Start time 1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum
PHIPTOC:
IFault = 2 × set Start 16 ms 19 ms 23 ms
value
IFault = 10 × set Start 11 ms 12 ms 14 ms
value
PHHPTOC and
FPHLPTOC:
IFault = 2 x set Start 22 ms 24 ms 25 ms
value
Reset time Typically 40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <30 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±40 ms 3)4)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression
P-to-P+backup: No suppression
1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, fault
current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on
statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5...20
4) Valid for FPHLPTOC
4.1.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase directional overcurrent FDPHLPDOC 3I> -> 67-1
protection - Low stage
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHHPDOC 3I>> -> 67-2
protection - High stage
FDPHLPDOC DPHHPDOC
I_A OPERATE I_A OPERATE
I_B START I_B START
I_C I_C
I2 I2
U_A_AB U_A_AB
U_B_BC U_B_BC
U_C_CA U_C_CA
U1 U1
U2 U2
BLOCK BLOCK
ENA_MULT ENA_MULT
NON_DIR NON_DIR
GUID-24B6C85F-8A9F-4A06-A449-848954A2697E V1 EN
4.1.2.3 Functionality
(F)DPHxPDOC starts up when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and
directional criterion is fulfilled. The operate time characteristics for low stage
FDPHLPDOC and high stage DPHHPDOC can be selected to be either definite
time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).
In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
GUID-C5892F3E-09D9-462E-A963-023EFC18DDE7 V3 EN
Directional calculation
The directional calculation compares the current phasors to the polarizing phasor.
A suitable polarization quantity can be selected from the different polarization
quantities, which are the positive sequence voltage, negative sequence voltage, self-
polarizing (faulted) voltage and cross-polarizing voltages (healthy voltages). The
polarizing method is defined with the Pol quantity setting.
The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. The
user can select either "Non-directional", "Forward" or "Reverse" operation. By
setting the value of Allow Non Dir to "True", the non-directional operation is
allowed when the directional information is invalid.
The Characteristic angle setting is used to turn the directional characteristic. The
value of Characteristic angle should be chosen in such a way that all the faults in
the operating direction are seen in the operating zone and all the faults in the
opposite direction are seen in the non-operating zone. The value of Characteristic
angle depends on the network configuration.
Reliable operation requires both the operating and polarizing quantities to exceed
certain minimum amplitude levels. The minimum amplitude level for the operating
quantity (current) is set with the Min operate current setting. The minimum
amplitude level for the polarizing quantity (voltage) is set with the Min operate
voltage setting. If the amplitude level of the operating quantity or polarizing
quantity is below the set level, the direction information of the corresponding phase
is set to "Unknown".
The polarizing quantity validity can remain valid even if the amplitude of the
polarizing quantity falls below the value of the Min operate voltage setting. In this
case, the directional information is provided by a special memory function for a
time defined with the Voltage Mem time setting.
The value for the Min operate voltage setting should be carefully
selected since the accuracy in low signal levels is strongly affected
by the measuring device accuracy.
When the voltage falls below Min operate voltage at a close fault, the fictive
voltage is used to determine the phase angle. The measured voltage is applied again
as soon as the voltage rises above Min operate voltage and hysteresis. The fictive
voltage is also discarded if the measured voltage stays below Min operate voltage
and hysteresis for longer than Voltage Mem time or if the fault current disappears
while the fictive voltage is in use. When the voltage is below Min operate voltage
and hysteresis and the fictive voltage is unusable, the fault direction cannot be
determined. The fictive voltage can be unusable for two reasons:
• The fictive voltage is discarded after Voltage Mem time
• The phase angle cannot be reliably measured before the fault situation.
GUID-718D61B4-DAD0-4F43-8108-86F7B44E7E2D V1 EN
Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector reports the exceeding
of the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start
value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.
The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.
The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.
A070554 V1 EN
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.
If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"
causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.
The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.
The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.
The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area
is limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse
operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings.
In the forward operation area, the Max forward angle setting gives the
counterclockwise sector and the Min forward angle setting gives the corresponding
clockwise sector, measured from the Characteristic angle setting.
In the backward operation area, the Max reverse angle setting gives the
counterclockwise sector and the Min reverse angle setting gives the corresponding
clockwise sector, a measurement from the Characteristic angle setting that has
been rotated 180 degrees.
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) is set positive if the operating current lags the
polarizing quantity and negative if the operating current leads the polarizing quantity.
GUID-CD0B7D5A-1F1A-47E6-AF2A-F6F898645640 V2 EN
Table 172: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C
The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined 0 = unknown
sectors, or the direction cannot be defined due
too low amplitude
The ANGLE_X is in the forward sector 1 = forward
The ANGLE_X is in the reverse sector 2 = backward
(The ANGLE_X is in both forward and reverse 3 = both
sectors, that is, when the sectors are overlapping)
Table 173: Momentary phase combined direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for phase combined direction information The value for DIRECTION
The direction information (DIR_X) for all phases 0 = unknown
is unknown
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 1 = forward
phase is forward, none being in reverse
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 2 = backward
phase is reverse, none being in forward
The direction information (DIR_X) for some 3 = both
phase is forward and for some phase is reverse
FAULT_DIR gives the detected direction of the fault during fault situations, that is,
when the START output is active.
B IB UB ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U B ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-9AF57A77-F9C6-46B7-B056-AC7542EBF449 V2 EN
C IC UC ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U C ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-51FEBD95-672C-440F-A678-DD01ABB2D018 V2 EN
In an example case of the phasors in a single-phase earth fault where the faulted
phase is phase A, the angle difference between the polarizing quantity UA and
operating quantity IA is marked as φ. In the self-polarization method, there is no
need to rotate the polarizing quantity.
GUID-C648173C-D8BB-4F37-8634-5D4DC7D366FF V1 EN
GUID-65CFEC0E-0367-44FB-A116-057DD29FEB79 V1 EN
Figure 82: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C
B IB UCA
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U CA ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-F5252292-E132-41A7-9F6D-C2A3958EE6AD V3 EN
C IC UAB
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U AB ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-84D97257-BAEC-4264-9D93-EC2DF853EAE1 V3 EN
A-B IA - IB UBC -
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U BC - U CA ) - ϕ ( I A - I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
UCA
GUID-AFB15C3F-B9BB-47A2-80E9-796AA1165409 V2 EN
B-C IB - IC UCA -
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U CA - U AB ) - ϕ ( I B - I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
UAB
GUID-C698D9CA-9139-40F2-9097-007B6B14D053 V2 EN
C-A IC - IA UAB -
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U AB - U BC ) - ϕ ( I C - I A ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
UBC
GUID-838ECE7D-8B1C-466F-8166-E8FE16D28AAD V2 EN
The angle difference between the polarizing quantity UBC and operating quantity
IA is marked as φ in an example of the phasors in a single-phase earth fault where
the faulted phase is phase A. The polarizing quantity is rotated with 90 degrees.
The characteristic angle is assumed to be ~ 0 degrees.
GUID-6C7D1317-89C4-44BE-A1EB-69BC75863474 V1 EN
GUID-C2EC2EF1-8A84-4A32-818C-6D7620EA9969 V1 EN
Figure 84: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C
UA
IA
UA
IA U
2
I2
UCA UAB IC
IB
IC IB
U2
I2
UC UB
UC UBC UB
A B
GUID-027DD4B9-5844-4C46-BA9C-54784F2300D3 V2 EN
Figure 85: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phases A-N, and two-phase
short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing
quantity is the negative-sequence voltage -U2
B IB U1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I B ) − ϕ RCA − 120o
GUID-648D061C-6F5F-4372-B120-0F02B42E9809 V4 EN
C IC U1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I C ) − ϕ RCA + 120o
GUID-355EF014-D8D0-467E-A952-1D1602244C9F V4 EN
A-B IA - IB U1
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I A − I B ) − ϕ RCA + 30o
GUID-B07C3B0A-358E-480F-A059-CC5F3E6839B1 V3 EN
B-C IB - IC U1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I B − I C ) − ϕ RCA − 90o
GUID-4597F122-99A6-46F6-A38C-81232C985BC9 V3 EN
C-A IC - IA U1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I C − I A ) − ϕ RCA + 150o
GUID-9892503C-2233-4BC5-8C54-BCF005E20A08 V3 EN
UA
IA U1
U1
UA
-90°
IA
IB - Ic
-IC
IB
IB IC
IC
UC UB
UC UB
A B
GUID-1937EA60-4285-44A7-8A7D-52D7B66FC5A6 V3 EN
Figure 86: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phase A to ground, and a two-
phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the
polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage U1
The network rotating direction is set in the IED using the parameter
in the HMI menu: Configuration/System/Phase rotation. The
default parameter value is "ABC".
UA UA
IA IA
IB IC
IC IB
UC UBC UB UB UBC UC
GUID-BF32C1D4-ECB5-4E96-A27A-05C637D32C86 V2 EN
4.1.2.7 Application
In radial networks, phase overcurrent IEDs are often sufficient for the short circuit
protection of lines, transformers and other equipment. The current-time
characteristic should be chosen according to the common practice in the network. It
is recommended to use the same current-time characteristic for all overcurrent
IEDs in the network. This includes the overcurrent protection of transformers and
other equipment.
The phase overcurrent protection can also be used in closed ring systems as short
circuit protection. Because the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in
closed ring networks can be complicated, a large number of fault current
calculations are needed. There are situations with no possibility to have the
selectivity with a protection system based on overcurrent IEDs in a closed ring system.
there is a risk that the fault situation in one part of the feeding system can de-
energize the whole system connected to the LV side.
GUID-1A2BD0AD-B217-46F4-A6B4-6FC6E6256EB3 V2 EN
GUID-74662396-1BAD-4AC2-ADB6-F4A8B3341860 V2 EN
arrows define the non-directional functionality where faults can be detected in both
directions.
GUID-276A9D62-BD74-4335-8F20-EC1731B58889 V1 EN
Figure 90: Closed ring network topology where feeding lines are protected
with directional overcurrent IEDs
4.1.2.8 Signals
Table 177: FDPHLPDOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional
4.1.2.9 Settings
Table 181: FDPHLPDOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling
the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in
IEC/ANSI IDMT
curves
Operate delay 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
time
Table continues on next page
FDPHLPDOC Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Phase angle: ±2°
DPHHPDOC Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × In)
±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 × In)
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Phase angle: ±2°
1) Measurement mode and Pol quantity = default, current before fault = 0.0 × In, voltage before fault =
1.0 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, fault current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase
angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20
4) Valid for FDPHLPDOC
4.1.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase thermal protection for T1PTTR 3lth> 49F
feeders, cables and distribution
transformers
A070691 V3 EN
4.1.3.3 Functionality
The increased utilization of power systems closer to the thermal limits has
generated a need for a thermal overload function also for power lines.
A thermal overload is in some cases not detected by other protection functions, and
the introduction of the thermal overload function T1PTTR allows the protected
circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits.
An alarm level gives an early warning to allow operators to take action before the
line trips. The early warning is based on the three-phase current measuring function
using a thermal model with first order thermal loss with the settable time constant.
If the temperature rise continues the function will operate based on the thermal
model of the line.
Re-energizing of the line after the thermal overload operation can be inhibited
during the time the cooling of the line is in progress. The cooling of the line is
estimated by the thermal model.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
The operation of the three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and
distribution transformers can be described using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
The function uses ambient temperature which can be measured locally or remotely.
Local measurement is done by the IED. Remote measurement uses analog GOOSE
to connect AMB_TEMP input.
Figure 92: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase
currents.
Temperature estimator
The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents
according to the expression:
2
I
Θ final = ⋅ Tref
I ref
A070780 V2 EN (Equation 2)
Current reference and Temperature rise setting values are used in the final
temperature estimation together with the ambient temperature. It is suggested to set
these values to the maximum steady state current allowed for the line or cable
under emergency operation for a few hours per years. Current values with the
corresponding conductor temperatures are given in cable manuals. These values are
given for conditions such as ground temperatures, ambient air temperature, the way
of cable laying and ground thermal resistivity.
Thermal counter
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
∆t
−
Θn = Θn −1 + Θ final − Θn −1 ⋅ 1 − e τ
( )
A070781 V2 EN (Equation 3)
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level Alarm value, the
output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip
level Maximum temperature, the OPERATE output is activated. The OPERATE
signal pulse length is fixed to 100 ms
There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:
Θ final − Θoperate
toperate = −τ ⋅ ln
Θ final − Θn
A070782 V2 EN (Equation 4)
temperature setting. The Maximum temperature value must be set at least two
degrees above the set value of Reclose temperature.
The time to lockout release is calculated, that is, the calculation of the cooling time
to a set value. The calculated temperature can be reset to its initial value (the Initial
temperature setting) via a control parameter that is located under the clear menu.
This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated
false temperature level.
A070783 V3 EN (Equation 5)
Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature.
In some applications, the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables.
By setting the Current multiplier parameter to the number of parallel lines (cables),
the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this
option, the ENA_MULT input must be activated.
The ambient temperature can be measured with the RTD measurement. The
measured temperature value is then connected, for example, from the AI_VAL3
output of the X130 (RTD) function to the AMB_TEMP input of T1PTTR.
The Env temperature Set setting is used to define the ambient temperature if the
ambient temperature measurement value is not connected to the AMB_TEMP input.
The Env temperature Set setting is also used when the ambient temperature
measurement connected to T1PTTR is set to “Not in use” in the X130 (RTD) function.
The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the Initial
temperature setting parameter. This is done in case the IED is powered up, the
function is turned "Off" and back "On" or reset through the Clear menu. The
temperature is also stored in the nonvolatile memory and restored in case the IED
is restarted.
The thermal time constant of the protected circuit is given in seconds with the Time
constant setting. Please see cable manufacturers manuals for further details.
4.1.3.5 Application
The lines and cables in the power system are constructed for a certain maximum
load current level. If the current exceeds this level, the losses will be higher than
expected. As a consequence, the temperature of the conductors will increase. If the
temperature of the lines and cables reaches too high values, it can cause a risk of
damages by, for example, the following ways:
• The sag of overhead lines can reach an unacceptable value.
• If the temperature of conductors, for example aluminium conductors, becomes
too high, the material will be destroyed.
• In cables the insulation can be damaged as a consequence of overtemperature,
and therefore phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults can occur.
In stressed situations in the power system, the lines and cables may be required to
be overloaded for a limited time. This should be done without any risk for the above-
mentioned risks.
If the temperature of the protected object reaches a set warning level, a signal is
given to the operator. This enables actions in the power system to be done before
dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the
maximum allowed temperature value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected
line.
4.1.3.6 Signals
Table 189: T1PTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for operate outputs
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable Current multiplier
TEMP_AMB FLOAT32 0 The ambient temperature used in the calculation
4.1.3.7 Settings
Table 191: T1PTTR Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Env temperature Set -50...100 °C 1 40 Ambient temperature used when no
external temperature measurement
available
Current multiplier 1...5 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for parallel lines
Current reference 0.05...4.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 The load current leading to Temperature
raise temperature
Temperature rise 0.0...200.0 °C 0.1 75.0 End temperature rise above ambient
Time constant 60...60000 s 1 2700 Time constant of the line in seconds.
Maximum temperature 20.0...200.0 °C 0.1 90.0 Temperature level for operate
Alarm value 20.0...150.0 °C 0.1 80.0 Temperature level for start (alarm)
Reclose temperature 20.0...150.0 °C 0.1 70.0 Temperature for reset of block reclose
after operate
4.2.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Non-directional earth-fault protection - FEFLPTOC Io> 51N-1
Low stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection - EFHPTOC Io>> 51N-2
High stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection - EFIPTOC Io>>> 50N/51N
Instantaneous stage
GUID-A8CD8E87-2B3B-420B-A4DC-FA88F16DD412 V1 EN
4.2.1.3 Functionality
The function starts and operates when the residual current exceeds the set limit.
The operate time characteristic for low stage FEFLPTOC and high stage
EFHPTOC can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT). The instantaneous stage EFIPTOC always operates with
the DT characteristic.
In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
A070437 V3 EN
Level detector
The operating quantity can be selected with the setting Io signal Sel. The selectable
options are "Measured Io" and "Calculated Io". The operating quantity is compared
to the set Start value. If the measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level
detector sends an enable-signal to the timer module. If the ENA_MULT input is
active, the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.
The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.
The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.
If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"
causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.
The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.
The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.
The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and
"Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode
setting.
(F)EFxPTOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the
timer characteristics with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings.
The IED provides 55 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the
special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. One user
programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable. In
addition to this, there are 39 curves for recloser applications. The user can choose
the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI Def.
Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both cases.
The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages:
The Type of reset curve setting does not apply to EFIPTOC or when
the DT operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by the
Reset delay time setting.
4.2.1.7 Application
Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. (F)EFxPTOC consists of three different protection stages.
• Low FEFLPTOC
• High EFHPTOC
• Instantaneous EFIPTOC
4.2.1.8 Signals
Table 199: FEFLPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
4.2.1.9 Settings
Table 205: FEFLPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...5.000 xIn 0.005 0.010 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling
the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in
IEC/ANSI IDMT
curves
Table continues on next page
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±40 ms 3)4)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression
1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, earth-
fault current with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5...20
4) Valid for FEFLPTOC
4.2.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional earth-fault protection - Low FDEFLPDEF Io>-> 67N-1
stage
Directional earth-fault protection - High DEFHPDEF Io>>-> 67N-2
stage
FDEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF
Io OPERATE Io OPERATE
Uo START Uo START
I2 I2
U2 U2
BLOCK BLOCK
ENA_MULT ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL RCA_CTL
GUID-6E1102BE-06F1-4F08-8236-4BC68F189321 V1 EN
4.2.2.3 Functionality
The function starts and operates when the operating quantity (current) and
polarizing quantity (voltage) exceed the set limits and the angle between them is
inside the set operating sector. The operate time characteristic for low stage
(FDEFLPDEF) and high stage (DEFHPDEF) can be selected to be either definite
time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).
In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
A070438 V3 EN
Level detector
The magnitude of the operating quantity is compared to the set Start value and the
magnitude of the polarizing quantity is compared to the set Voltage start value. If
both the limits are exceeded, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer
module. When the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "False", Voltage start value
has no effect and the level detection is purely based on the operating quantity. If
the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start
value Mult setting.
The operating quantity (residual current) can be selected with the setting Io signal
Sel. The options are "Measured Io" and "Calculated Io". If "Measured Io" is
selected, the current ratio for Io-channel is given in Configuration/Analog inputs/
Current (Io,CT). If "Calculated Io" is selected, the current ratio is obtained from
the phase-current channels given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Current
(3I,CT). The polarizing quantity can be selected with the setting Pol signal Sel.
The options are "Measured Uo", "Calculated Uo" and "Neg. seq. volt". If
"Measured Uo" is selected, the voltage ratio for Uo-channel is given in
Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (Uo,VT). If "Calculated Uo" or "Neg. seq.
volt" is selected, the voltage ratio is obtained from the phase-voltage channels
given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3U,VT).
Example 2: Both Io and Uo are calculated from the phase quantities. Phase CT-
ratio is 100 : 1 A and phase VT-ratio is 20/sqrt(3) kV : 100/sqrt(3) V. In this case,
"Calculated Io" and "Calculated Uo" are selected. The nominal values for residual
current and residual voltage are obtained from CT and VT ratios entered in
Residual current Io : Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (3I,CT): 100 A : 1 A.
The residual voltage Uo: Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3U,VT): 20.000
kV : 100 V. The Residual Current start value of 1.0 x In corresponds to 1.0 * 100
A = 100 A in the primary. The Residual Voltage start value of 1.0 x Un
corresponds to 1.0 * 20.000 kV = 20.000 kV in the primary.
Directional calculation
The directional calculation module monitors the angle between the polarizing
quantity and operating quantity. Depending on the Pol signal Sel setting, the
polarizing quantity can be the residual voltage (measured or calculated) or the
negative sequence voltage. When the angle is in the operation sector, the module
sends the enabling signal to the timer module.
The minimum signal level which allows the directional operation can be set with
the Min operate current and Min operate voltage settings.
If Pol signal Sel is set to "Measured Uo" or "Calculated Uo", the residual current
and residual voltage are used for directional calculation.
If Pol signal Sel is set to "Neg. seq. volt", the negative sequence current and
negative sequence voltage are used for directional calculation.
For defining the operation sector, there are five modes available through the
Operation mode setting.
The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. The
alternatives are "Non-directional", "Forward" and "Reverse" operation. The
operation criterion is selected with the Operation mode setting. By setting Allow
Non Dir to "True", non-directional operation is allowed when the directional
information is invalid, that is, when the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is less
than the value of the Min operate voltage setting.
The network rotating direction is set in the IED using the parameter
in the HMI menu: Configuration/System/Phase rotation.
The default parameter value is "ABC".
The Characteristic angle setting is used in the "Phase angle" mode to adjust the
operation according to the method of neutral point earthing so that in an isolated
network the Characteristic angle (φRCA) = -90° and in a compensated network
φRCA = 0°. In addition, the characteristic angle can be changed via the control
signal RCA_CTL. RCA_CTL affects the Characteristic angle setting.
The Correction angle setting can be used to improve selectivity due the
inaccuracies in the measurement transformers. The setting decreases the operation
sector. The correction can only be used with the "IoCos" or "IoSin" modes.
The polarity of the polarizing quantity can be reversed by setting the Pol reversal
to "True", which turns the polarizing quantity by 180 degrees.
The directional calculation module calculates several values which are presented in
the monitored data.
Monitored data values are accessible on the LHMI or through tools via
communications.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.
If a drop-off situation, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate delay
is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in the
reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset
curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the
reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT
curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def
time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an
immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends
on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset
time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The START output is
deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.
The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.
The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.
The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode
.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
Example 1
GUID-829C6CEB-19F0-4730-AC98-C5528C35A297 V2 EN
Example 2
The "Phase angle" mode is selected, solidly earthed network (φRCA = +60 deg)
GUID-D72D678C-9C87-4830-BB85-FE00F5EA39C2 V2 EN
Example 3
The "Phase angle" mode is selected, isolated network (φRCA = -90 deg)
GUID-67BE307E-576A-44A9-B615-2A3B184A410D V2 EN
A070441 V1 EN
A070444 V2 EN
The Petersen coil or the earthing resistor may be temporarily out of operation. To
keep the protection scheme selective, it is necessary to update the characteristic
angle setting accordingly. This can be done with an auxiliary input in the relay
which receives a signal from an auxiliary switch of the disconnector of the Petersen
Table 219: Relay characteristic angle control in Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) operation criteria
Operation mode setting: RCA_CTL = FALSE RCA_CTL = TRUE
Iosin Actual operation mode: Iosin Actual operation mode: Iocos
Iocos Actual operation mode: Iocos Actual operation mode: Iosin
A070443 V3 EN
The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and
"Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode
setting.
(F)DEFxPDEF supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the
timer characteristics with the Operating curve type setting.
The IED provides 55 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the
special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. One user
programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable. In
addition to this, there are 39 curves for recloser applications. The user can choose
the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI Def.
Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both cases.
The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages.
When the phase angle criterion is used, the function indicates with the
DIRECTION output whether the operating quantity is within the forward or
reverse operation sector or within the non-directional sector.
The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area
is limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse
operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings.
In the forward operation area, the Max forward angle setting gives the clockwise
sector and the Min forward angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise
sector, measured from the Characteristic angle setting.
In the reverse operation area, the Max reverse angle setting gives the clockwise
sector and the Min reverse angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise
sector, measured from the complement of the Characteristic angle setting (180
degrees phase shift) .
The relay characteristic angle (RCA) is set to positive if the operating current lags
the polarizing quantity. It is set to negative if it leads the polarizing quantity.
GUID-92004AD5-05AA-4306-9574-9ED8D51524B4 V2 EN
If the Allow Non Dir setting is "False", the directional operation (forward, reverse)
is not allowed when the measured polarizing or operating quantities are invalid,
that is, their magnitude is below the set minimum values. The minimum values can
be defined with the settings Min operate current and Min operate voltage. In case
of low magnitudes, the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs are set to 0 =
unknown, except when the Allow non dir setting is "True". In that case, the
The operation criteria Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) are selected with the Operation mode
setting using the values "IoSin" or "IoCos" respectively.
The angle correction setting can be used to improve selectivity. The setting
decreases the operation sector. The correction can only be used with the Iosin(φ) or
Iocos(φ) criterion. The RCA_CTL input is used to change the Io characteristic:
Table 225: Relay characteristic angle control in the IoSin and IoCos operation criteria
Operation mode: RCA_CTL = "False" RCA_CTL = "True"
IoSin Actual operation criterion: Actual operation criterion:
Iosin(φ) Iocos(φ)
IoCos Actual operation criterion: Actual operation criterion:
Iocos(φ) Iosin(φ)
When the Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ) criterion is used, the component indicates a forward-
or reverse-type fault through the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs, in which
1 equals a forward fault and 2 equals a reverse fault. Directional operation is not
allowed (the Allow non dir setting is "False") when the measured polarizing or
operating quantities are not valid, that is, when their magnitude is below the set
minimum values. The minimum values can be defined with the Min operate
current and Min operate voltage settings. In case of low magnitude, the
FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs are set to 0 = unknown, except when the
Allow non dir setting is "True". In that case, the function is allowed to operate in
the directional mode as non-directional, since the directional information is invalid.
The following examples show the characteristics of the different operation criteria:
Example 1.
=> FAULT_DIR = 1
GUID-560EFC3C-34BF-4852-BF8C-E3A2A7750275 V2 EN
The operating sector is limited by angle correction, that is, the operating sector is
180 degrees - 2*(angle correction).
Example 2.
=> FAULT_DIR = 2
GUID-10A890BE-8C81-45B2-9299-77DD764171E1 V2 EN
Example 3.
=> FAULT_DIR = 1
GUID-11E40C1F-6245-4532-9199-2E2F1D9B45E4 V2 EN
Example 4.
=> FAULT_DIR = 2
GUID-54ACB854-F11D-4AF2-8BDB-69E5F6C13EF1 V2 EN
Phase angle 80
The operation criterion phase angle 80 is selected with the Operation mode setting
by using the value "Phase angle 80".
Phase angle 80 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the
following differences:
• The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they
have a fixed value of 80 degrees
• The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded.
The sector rounding is used for cancelling the CT measurement errors at low
current amplitudes. When the current amplitude falls below three percent of the
nominal current, the sector is reduced to 70 degrees at the fixed sector side. This
makes the protection more selective, which means that the phase angle
measurement errors do not cause faulty operation.
GUID-EFC9438D-9169-4733-9BE9-6B343F37001A V2 EN
Io / % of In
10
Min forward angle 80 deg
9
8
7
6
Operating zone
4
3 3% of In
2 70 deg
Non- 1 1% of In
operating
zone -90 -75 -60 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
GUID-49D23ADF-4DA0-4F7A-8020-757F32928E60 V2 EN
Phase angle 88
The operation criterion phase angle 88 is selected with the Operation mode setting
using the value "Phase angle 88".
Phase angle 88 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the
following differences:
• The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they
have a fixed value of 88 degrees
• The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded.
GUID-0F0560B7-943E-4CED-A4B8-A561BAE08956 V2 EN
Io / % of In
88 deg
100 100% of In
Min forward angle
90
80
70
50
40
30 85 deg
20 20% of In
10 73 deg
1% of In
-90 -75 -60 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
GUID-F9F1619D-E1B5-4650-A5CB-B62A7F6B0A90 V2 EN
4.2.2.9 Application
Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. (F)DEFxPDEF consists of two different stages.
• Low FDEFLPDEF
• High DEFHPDEF
The protection can be based on the phase angle criterion with extended operating
sector. It can also be based on measuring either the reactive part Iosin(φ) or the
active part Iocos(φ) of the residual current. In isolated networks or in networks
with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is significantly
smaller than the short-circuit currents. In addition, the magnitude of the fault
current is almost independent of the fault location in the network.
The function uses the residual current components Iocos(φ) or Iosin(φ) according
to the earthing method, where φ is the angle between the residual current and the
reference residual voltage (-Uo). In compensated networks, the phase angle
criterion with extended operating sector can also be used. When the relay
characteristic angle RCA is 0 degrees, the negative quadrant of the operation sector
can be extended with the Min forward angle setting. The operation sector can be
set between 0 and -180 degrees, so that the total operation sector is from +90 to
-180 degrees. In other words, the sector can be up to 270 degrees wide. This allows
the protection settings to stay the same when the resonance coil is disconnected
from between the neutral point and earth.
System neutral earthing is meant to protect personnel and equipment and to reduce
interference for example in telecommunication systems. The neutral earthing sets
challenges for protection systems, especially for earth-fault protection.
In networks where the neutral point is earthed through low resistance, the
characteristic angle is also 0 degrees (for phase angle). Alternatively, Iocos(φ)
operation can be used.
In solidly earthed networks, the Characteristic angle is typically set to +60 degrees
for the phase angle. Alternatively, Iosin(φ) operation can be used with a reversal
polarizing quantity. The polarizing quantity can be rotated 180 degrees by setting
the Pol reversal parameter to "True" or by switching the polarity of the residual
voltage measurement wires. Although the Iosin(φ) operation can be used in solidly
earthed networks, the phase angle is recommended.
Attention should be paid to make sure the measuring transformers are connected
correctly so that (F)DEFxPDEF is able to detect the fault current direction without
failure. As directional earth fault uses residual current and residual voltage (-Uo),
the poles of the measuring transformers must match each other and also the fault
current direction. Also the earthing of the cable sheath must be taken into notice
when using core balance current transformers. The following figure describes how
measuring transformers can be connected to the IED.
A070697 V2 EN
4.2.2.10 Signals
Table 226: FDEFLPDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0=False Relay characteristic angle control
4.2.2.11 Settings
Table 230: FDEFLPDEF Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...5.000 xIn 0.005 0.010 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling
the start value
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in
IEC/ANSI IDMT
curves
Table continues on next page
FDEFLPDEF Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
Voltage
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Phase angle:
±2°
DEFHPDEF Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × In)
±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 × In)
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Phase angle:
±2°
1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, earth-
fault current with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5...20
4) Valid for FDEFLPDEF
4.2.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Transient/intermittent earth-fault INTRPTEF Io> ->IEF 67NIEF
protection
A070663 V2 EN
4.2.3.3 Functionality
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
Fault Timer 1
Io OPERATE
Transient t
indication
detector
Uo logic START
Timer 2
Level
BLK_EF
detector
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
A070661 V4 EN
Figure 114: Functional module diagram. Io and Uo stand for residual current
and residual voltage
Level detector
The residual voltage can be selected from the Uo signal Sel setting. The options are
"Measured Uo" and "Calculated Uo". If "Measured Uo" is selected, the voltage
ratio for Uo-channel is given in the global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/
Voltage (Uo,VT). If "Calculated Uo" is selected, the voltage ratio is obtained from
phase-voltage channels given in the global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/
Voltage (3U,VT).
Transient detector
The Transient detector module is used for detecting transients in the residual
current and residual voltage signals.
The Fault indication logic module determines the direction of the fault. The fault
direction determination is secured by multi-frequency neutral admittance
measurement and special filtering techniques. This enables fault direction
determination which is not sensitive to disturbances in measured Io and Uo signals,
for example, switching transients.
When Directional mode setting "Forward" is used, the protection operates when
the fault is in the protected feeder. When Directional mode setting "Reverse" is
used, the protection operates when the fault is outside the protected feeder (in the
background network). If the direction has no importance, the value "Non-
directional" can be selected. The detected fault direction (FAULT_DIR) is
available in the monitored data view.
In the "Transient EF" mode, when the start transient of the fault is detected and the
Uo level exceeds the set Voltage start value, Timer 1 is activated. Timer 1 is kept
activated until the Uo level exceeds the set value or in case of a drop-off, the drop-
off duration is shorter than the set Reset delay time.
In the "Intermittent EF" mode, when the start transient of the fault is detected and
the Uo level exceeds the set Voltage start value, the Timer 1 is activated. When a
required number of intermittent earth-fault transients set with the Peak counter
limit setting are detected without the function being reset (depends on the drop-off
time set with the Reset delay time setting), the START output is activated. The
Timer 1 is kept activated as long as transients are occurring during the drop-off
time defined by setting Reset delay time.
Timer 1
The time characteristic is according to DT.
In the "Transient EF" mode, the OPERATE output is activated after Operate delay
time if the residual voltage exceeds the set Voltage start value. The Reset delay
time starts to elapse when residual voltage falls below Voltage start value. If there
is no OPERATE activation, for example, the fault disappears momentarily, START
stays activated until the the Reset delay time elapses. After OPERATE activation,
START and OPERATE signals are reset as soon as Uo falls below Voltage start
value.
GUID-BE2849D3-015B-4A05-85EF-FD7E8EF29CA3 V1 EN
In the "Intermittent EF" mode the OPERATE output is activated when the
following conditions are fulfilled:
• the number of transients that have been detected exceeds the Peak counter
limit setting
• the timer has reached the time set with the Operate delay time
• and one additional transient is detected during the drop-off cycle
The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient (peak). In case
there is no OPERATE activation, for example, the fault disappears momentarily
START stays activated until the Reset delay time elapses, that is, reset takes place if
time between transients is more than Reset delay time. After OPERATE activation,
a fixed pulse length of 100 ms for OPERATE is given, whereas START is reset
after Reset delay time elapses
GUID-27C77008-B292-4112-9CF6-4B95EE19B9EC V1 EN
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Timer 2
If the function is used in the directional mode and an opposite direction transient is
detected, the BLK_EF output is activated for the fixed delay time of 25 ms. If the
START output is activated when the BLK_EF output is active, the BLK_EF output
is deactivated.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the Freeze timers mode,
the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the Block all mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the Block OPERATE output
mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated.
4.2.3.5 Application
2
Residual Current (kA)
INCOMER
0
Uo
Ictot Ioj Iov -0.1 Uo
Pulse width
400 - 800 s
Fault -0.2
Point UUtres R Ioj
tres f Pulse interval
(Faulty 5 - 300 ms
Feeder)
-0.3
Peak value
~0.1 ... 5 kA
GUID-415078AD-21B3-4103-9622-712BB88F274A V2 EN
Earth-fault transients
In general, earth faults generate transients in currents and voltages. There are
several factors that affect the magnitude and frequency of these transients, such as
the fault moment on the voltage wave, fault location, fault resistance and the
parameters of the feeders and the supplying transformers. In the fault initiation, the
voltage of the faulty phase decreases and the corresponding capacitance is
discharged to earth (→ discharge transients). At the same time, the voltages of the
healthy phases increase and the related capacitances are charged (→ charge transient).
If the fault is permanent (non-transient) in nature, only the initial fault transient in
current and voltage can be measured, whereas the intermittent fault creates
repetitive transients.
GUID-CC4ADDEA-EE11-4011-B184-F873473EBA9F V1 EN
4.2.3.6 Signals
Table 238: INTRPTEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
4.2.3.7 Settings
Table 240: INTRPTEF Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Operate delay time 40...1200000 ms 10 500 Operate delay time
Voltage start value 0.05...0.50 xUn 0.01 0.20 Voltage start value
4.2.4.1 Identification
Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM Yo>-> 21YN
GUID-70A9F388-3588-4550-A291-CB0E74E95F6E V2 EN
4.2.4.3 Functionality
EFPADM is based on evaluating the neutral admittance of the network, that is, the
quotient:
Yo = Io / −Uo
GUID-F8BBC6A4-47BB-4FCB-A2E0-87FD46073AAF V1 EN (Equation 6)
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
Timer
Io OPERATE
Neutral
Operation t
admittance
characteristics
calculation
Uo START
RELEASE
Blocking
BLOCK logic
GUID-BAD34871-A440-433D-8101-022E1E245A0D V1 EN
(Io,CT). If "Calculated Io" is selected, the current ratio is obtained from phase-
current channels given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (3I,CT).
Respectively, the residual voltage can be selected from the Uo signal Sel setting.
The setting options are "Measured Uo" and "Calculated Uo". If "Measured Uo" is
selected, the voltage ratio for Uo-channel is given in Configuration/Analog
inputs/Voltage (Uo,VT). If "Calculated Uo" is selected, the voltage ratio is
obtained from phase-voltage channels given in Configuration/Analog inputs/
Voltage (3U,VT).
When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage start value, an earth
fault is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released.
When Admittance Clc mode is set to "Delta", the external logic used must be able
to give RELEASE in less than 0.1 s from fault initiation. Otherwise the collected pre-
fault values are overwritten with fault time values. If it is slower, Admittance Clc
mode must be set to “Normal”.
Neutral admittance is calculated as the quotient between the residual current and
residual voltage (polarity reversed) fundamental frequency phasors. The
Admittance Clc mode setting defines the calculation mode.
Io fault
Yo =
−Uo fault
GUID-B1E03EA1-E958-43F3-8A28-2D268138DE36 V1 EN (Equation 7)
Io fault − Io prefault ∆ Io
Yo = =
−(Uo fault − Uo prefault ) − ∆Uo
GUID-B0611FF1-46FD-4E81-A11D-4721F0AF7BF8 V1 EN (Equation 8)
Neutral admittance calculation produces certain values during forward and reverse
faults.
Yo = −Y Fdtot
GUID-B6E3F720-1F9F-4C11-A5DC-722838E8CCDA V1 EN (Equation 9)
I eFd
≈ −j⋅
U ph
GUID-19AA418B-9A0A-4CEE-8772-0CD3F595E63F V1 EN (Equation 10)
YFdtot Sum of the phase-to-earth admittances (YFdA, YFdB, YFdC) of the protected feeder
IeFd Magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is
zero ohm
Uph Magnitude of the nominal phase-to-earth voltage of the system
Equation 9 shows that in case of outside faults, the measured admittance equals the
admittance of the protected feeder with a negative sign. The measured admittance
is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured admittance is due to
the leakage losses of the feeder. Theoretically, the measured admittance is located
in the third quadrant in the admittance plane close to the im(Yo) axis, see Figure
121.
Io
A B C
Protected feeder
EA
~ YFd
EB
EC
~
~ Background network
Rn
Uo
Lcc Reverse
Rcc Fault
YBg
Im(Yo)
Re(Yo)
Reverse fault:
Yo ≈ -j*IeFd/Uph
GUID-B852BF65-9C03-49F2-8FA9-E958EB37FF13 V1 EN
I eFd 10 A
Yo ≈ − j ⋅ = −j⋅ = − j ⋅ 1.15 milliSiemens
U ph 15 3kV
GUID-E2A45F20-9821-436E-94F1-F0BFCB78A1E3 V1 EN (Equation 11)
In this case, the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to leakage losses
of the protected feeder. As they are typically very small, the resistive part is close
to zero. Due to inaccuracies in the voltage and current measurement, the small real
part of the apparent neutral admittance may appear positive. This should be
considered in the setting of the admittance characteristic.
Fault in the forward direction, that is, inside the protected feeder.
Unearthed network.
Yo = Y Bgtot
GUID-5F1D2145-3C0F-4F8F-9E17-5B88C1822566 V1 EN (Equation 12)
I −I
≈ j ⋅ eTot eFd
U ph
GUID-0B7C9BA9-B41B-4825-9C1B-F8F36640B693 V1 EN (Equation 13)
Compensated network:
Yo = Y Bgtot + Y CC
GUID-F3810944-D0E1-4C9A-A99B-8409F4D3CF05 V1 EN (Equation 14)
Yo = Y Bgtot + Y Rn
GUID-F91DA4E4-F439-4BFA-AA0D-5839B1574946 V1 EN (Equation 16)
I Rn + j ⋅ ( I eTot − I eFd )
≈
U ph
GUID-CAA0C492-20CF-406C-80AC-8301375AB454 V1 EN (Equation 17)
YBgtot Sum of the phase-to-earth admittances (YBgA, YBgB, YBgC) of the background network
YCC Admittance of the earthing arrangement (compensation coil and parallel resistor)
IeFd Magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is zero ohm
IeTot Magnitude of the uncompensated earth-fault current of the network when Rf is zero ohm
Equation 12 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in unearthed
networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background
network. The admittance is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the
measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network.
Theoretically, the measured admittance is located in the first quadrant in the
admittance plane, close to the im(Yo) axis, see Figure 122.
Equation 16 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in high-
resistance earthed systems, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the
background network and the neutral earthing resistor. Basically, the imaginary part
of the measured admittance is due to the phase-to-earth capacitances of the
background network, and the resistive part is due to the neutral earthing resistor
and the leakage losses of the background network. Theoretically, the measured
admittance is located in the first quadrant in the admittance plane, see Figure 122.
Io
A B C
Protected feeder
Forward
Fault
EA
~ YFd
EB
EC
~
IeFd IeTot
~ Background network
Rn
Uo
Lcc
Rcc
YBg (IeTot - IeFd)
Forward fault,
high resistance earthed network:
Yo ≈ (IRn+j*(IeTot-IeFd))/Uph
Im(Yo)
Forward fault,
unearthed network:
Yo ≈ j*(IeTot-IeFd)/Uph
Under-comp. (K<1)
Re(Yo)
Resonance (K=1)
Reverse fault:
Yo ≈ -j*IeFd/Uph
Over-comp. (K>1)
During an earth fault in the forward direction, that is, inside the protected feeder,
the theoretical value for the measured admittance after the connection of the
parallel resistor can be calculated.
Before the parallel resistor is connected, the resistive part of the measured
admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network and the losses of
the coil. As they are typically small, the resistive part may not be sufficiently large
to secure the discrimination of the fault and its direction based on the measured
conductance. This and the rating and the operation logic of the parallel resistor
should be considered when setting the admittance characteristic.
Operation characteristic
After the admittance calculation is released, the calculated neutral admittance is
compared to the admittance characteristic boundaries in the admittance plane. If the
calculated neutral admittance Yo moves outside the characteristic, the enabling
signal is sent to the timer.
The options for the Directional mode setting are "Non-directional", "Forward" and
"Reverse".
Figure 123, Figure 124 and Figure 125 illustrate the admittance characteristics
supported by EFPADM and the settings relevant to that particular characteristic.
The most typical characteristics are highlighted and explained in details in the
chapter Neutral admittance characteristics. Operation is achieved when the
calculated neutral admittance Yo moves outside the characteristic (the operation
area is marked with gray).
100 1A
Y pri = 5.00 milliSiemens ⋅ = 4.33 milliSiemens
11547 100V
GUID-9CFD2291-9894-4D04-9499-DF38F1F64D59 V1 EN
GUID-FD8DAB15-CA27-40B0-9A43-FCF0881DB21E V2 EN
GUID-7EDB14B9-64B4-449C-9290-70A4CC2D588F V2 EN
GUID-C847609F-E261-4265-A1D9-3C449F8672A1 V2 EN
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with the
Operate delay time setting, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault
disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer
reaches the value set with the Reset delay time setting, the operation timer resets
and the START output is deactivated. The timer calculates the start duration value
START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set
operation time. The value is available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE output
is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole
function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output"
mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated.
The applied characteristic should always be set to cover the total admittance of the
protected feeder with a suitable margin. However, more detailed setting value
selection principles depend on the characteristic in question.
The forward and reverse boundary settings should be set so that the forward setting
is always larger than the reverse setting and that there is space between them.
Overadmittance characteristic
The overadmittance criterion is enabled with the setting Operation mode set to
"Yo". The characteristic is a circle with the radius defined with the Circle radius
setting. For the sake of application flexibility, the midpoint of the circle can be
moved away from the origin with the Circle conductance and Circle susceptance
settings. Default values for Circle conductance and Circle susceptance are 0.0 mS,
that is, the characteristic is an origin-centered circle.
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the circle.
GUID-AD789221-4073-4587-8E82-CD9BBD672AE0 V2 EN
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over either of the
boundary lines.
GUID-F5487D41-6B8E-4A7A-ABD3-EBF7254ADC4C V2 EN
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over the boundary line.
GUID-43F312AA-874A-4CE7-ABFE-D76BA70B7A5D V2 EN
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over the boundary line.
GUID-43B0F2F9-38CE-4F94-8381-0F20A0668AB1 V2 EN
GUID-7AE09721-1428-4392-9142-A6D39FD4C287 V2 EN
For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary lines can be tilted by the angle
defined with the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings. By
default, the tilt angles are zero degrees, that is, the boundary lines are straight lines
in the admittance plane. A positive Conductance tilt Ang value rotates the
overconductance boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis. A positive
Susceptance tilt Ang value rotates the oversusceptance boundary line
counterclockwise from the horizontal axis.
GUID-1A21391B-A053-432B-8A44-7D2BF714C52D V2 EN
GUID-0A34B498-4FDB-44B3-A539-BAE8F10ABDF0 V2 EN
4.2.4.6 Application
To apply the neutral admittance protection, at least the following network data are
required:
Figure 133 shows the influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage
magnitude in unearthed and compensated networks. Such information should be
available to verify the correct Voltage start value setting, which helps fulfill the
requirements for the sensitivity of the protection in terms of fault resistance.
70 Rf = 2500 ohm 70 70
60 Rf = 5000 ohm 60 60
Rf = 10000 ohm
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100
Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm
GUID-3880FB01-5C89-4E19-A529-805208382BB1 V1 EN
70 Rf = 2500 ohm 70 70
60 Rf = 5000 ohm 60 60
50 Rf = 10000 ohm 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm
GUID-6321328D-6C17-4155-A2DF-7E1C47A44D53 V1 EN
Example
In a 15 kV, 50 Hz compensated network, the maximum value for Uo during the
healthy state is 10%×Uph. Maximum earth-fault current of the system is 100 A.
The maximum earth fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω). The
applied active current forcing scheme uses a 15 A resistor (at 15 kV), which is
connected in parallel to the coil during the fault after a 1.0 second delay.
Solution: As a start condition for the neutral admittance protection, the internal
residual overvoltage condition of EFPADM is used. The Voltage start value setting
must be set above the maximum healthy-state Uo of 10%×Uph with a suitable margin.
10 A
Y Fdtot = ≈ j ⋅ 1.15 mS
15kV 3
GUID-3631BAB9-7D65-4591-A3D6-834687D0E03C V2 EN
15 A
Gcc = ≈ 1.73 mS
15kV 3
GUID-4B7A18DE-68CB-42B2-BF02-115F0ECC03D9 V2 EN
Yo = −Y Fdtot ≈ − j ⋅1.15 mS
GUID-AD02E209-1740-4930-8E28-AB85637CEF0D V2 EN
Yo = Y Bgtot + Y CC ≈ (1.73 + j ⋅ B ) mS
GUID-28AF4976-1872-48A1-ACC7-7CC3B51CD9D8 V2 EN
Where the imaginary part of the admittance, B, depends on the tuning of the coil
(compensation degree).
The admittance characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected
feeder with a proper margin, see Figure 136. Different setting groups can be used
to allow adaptation of protection settings to different feeder and network
configurations.
Conductance forward
This setting should be set based on the parallel resistor value of the coil. It must be
set to a lower value than the conductance of the parallel resistor, in order to enable
dependable operation. The selected value should move the boundary line from
origin to include some margin for the admittance operation point due to CT/VT-
errors, when fault is located outside the feeder.
In case of smaller rated value of the parallel resistor, for example, 5 A (at 15 kV),
the recommended security margin should be larger, for example 0.7, so that
sufficient margin for CT/VT-errors can be achieved.
Susceptance forward
Susceptance reverse
This setting should be set based on the value of the maximum earth-fault current
produced by the feeder (considering possible feeder topology changes) with a
security margin. This ensures that the admittance operating point stays inside the
"Box"-characteristics during outside fault. The recommended security margin
should not be lower than 1.5.
Conductance reverse
GUID-AE9BB46E-B927-43F6-881A-A96D3410268D V2 EN
4.2.4.7 Signals
Table 246: EFPADM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to release neutral admittance
protection
4.2.4.8 Settings
Table 248: EFPADM Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage start value 0.05...5.00 xUn 0.01 0.05 Voltage start value
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Operation mode 1=Yo 1=Yo Operation criteria
2=Go
3=Bo
4=Yo, Go
5=Yo, Bo
6=Go, Bo
7=Yo, Go, Bo
Operate delay time 60...200000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time
Circle radius 0.05...500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Admittance circle radius
Circle conductance -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 0.00 Admittance circle midpoint, conductance
Circle susceptance -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 0.00 Admittance circle midpoint, susceptance
Conductance forward -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Conductance threshold in forward
direction
Conductance reverse -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 -1.00 Conductance threshold in reverse
direction
Conductance tilt Ang -30...30 deg 1 0 Tilt angle of conductance boundary line
Susceptance forward -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Susceptance threshold in forward
direction
Susceptance reverse -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 -1.00 Susceptance threshold in reverse
direction
Susceptance tilt Ang -30...30 deg 1 0 Tilt angle of susceptance boundary line
±1.0% or ±0.01 mS
(In range of 0.5...100 mS)
1) Uo = 1.0 × Un
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact. Results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements.
4.2.5.1 Identification
Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE
identification identification identification
Harmonics earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC Io>HA 51NHA
GUID-A27B40F5-1E7D-4880-BBC4-3B07B73E9067 V2 EN
4.2.5.3 Functionality
The function starts when the harmonics content of the earth-fault current exceeds
the set limit. The operation time characteristic is either definite time (DT) or
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). If the horizontal communication is used
for the exchange of current values between the IEDs, the function operates
according to the DT characteristic.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
GUID-DFEDB90A-4ECE-4BAA-9987-87F02BA0798A V2 EN
Harmonics calculation
This module feeds the measured residual current to the high-pass filter, where the
frequency range is limited to start from two times the fundamental frequency of the
network (for example, in a 50 Hz network the cutoff frequency is 100 Hz), that is,
summing the harmonic components of the network from the second harmonic. The
output of the filter, later referred to as the harmonics current, is fed to the Level
detector and Current comparison modules.
The harmonics current I_HARM_RES is available in the monitored data view. The
value is also sent over horizontal communication to the other IEDs on the parallel
feeders configured in the protection scheme.
1.0
Normalized output
0.5
0
0 f 2f
Frequency
GUID-F05BA8C4-AC2B-420C-AE9D-946E815682D5 V1 EN
Level detector
The harmonics current is compared to the Start value setting. If the value exceeds
the value of the Start value setting, Level detector sends an enabling signal to the
Timer module.
Current comparison
The maximum of the harmonics currents reported by other parallel feeders in the
substation, that is, in the same busbar, is fed to the function through the
I_REF_RES input. If the locally measured harmonics current is higher than
I_REF_RES, the enabling signal is sent to Timer.
If the locally measured harmonics current is lower than I_REF_RES, the fault is
not in that feeder. The detected situation blocks Timer internally, and
simultaneously also the BLKD_I_REF output is activated.
The module also supervises the communication channel validity which is reported
to the Timer.
Timer
The START output is activated when Level detector sends the enabling signal.
Functionality and the time characteristics depend on the selected value of the
Enable reference use setting.
Reference use Communication When using the horizontal communication, the function
valid is forced to use the DT characteristics. When the
operation timer has reached the value of the Minimum
operate time setting and simultaneously the enabling
signal from the Current comparison module is active, the
OPERATE signal is activated.
The Enable reference use setting forces the function to use the DT
characteristics where the operating time is set with the Minimum
operate time setting.
If the communication for some reason fails, the function switches to use the
Operation curve type setting, and if DT is selected, Operate delay time is used. If
the IDMT curve is selected, the time characteristics are according to the selected
curve and the Minimum operate time setting is used for restricting too fast an
operation time.
When the programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics
are defined with the Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C,
Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E parameters.
If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operation delay is exceeded, the Timer reset state is activated. The functionality of
Timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the value of the Reset delay time setting is
exceeded. When the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can
be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type
"Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset",
the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type
"Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation.
If the drop-off situation continues, the reset timer is reset and the START output is
deactivated.
The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operation and reset times.
The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired
operation time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are
used
The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. More
information can be found in the IDMT curves for overcurrent
protection.
Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation, and the set operating time, which can be
either according to DT or IDMT. The value is available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the “Freeze timers”
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the “Block all” mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the Block OPERATE output
mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated.
4.2.5.5 Application
During an earth fault, HAEFPTOC calculates the maximum current for the current
feeder. The value is sent over an analog GOOSE to other IEDs of the busbar in the
substation. At the configuration level, all the values received over the analog
GOOSE are compared through the MAX function to find the maximum value. The
maximum value is sent back to HAEFPTOC as the I_REF_RES input. The
operation of HAEFPTOC is allowed in case I_REF_RES is lower than the locally
measured harmonics current. If I_REF_RES exceeds the locally measured
harmonics current, the operation of HAEFPTOC is blocked.
Analogue
GOOSE
receive
Analogue
GOOSE
receive HAEFPTOC
Io START
MAX I_REF_RES OPERATE Analogue
BLOCK I_HARM_RES GOOSE
BLKD_I_REF send
Analogue
GOOSE
receive
GUID-4F4792F0-B311-4EB2-8EC8-56F062592158 V1 EN
4.2.5.6 Signals
Table 253: HAEFPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
I_REF_RES FLOAT32 0.0 Reference current
4.2.5.7 Settings
Table 255: HAEFPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 100...200000 ms 10 600 Operate delay time
Minimum operate time 100...200000 ms 10 500 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Enable reference use 0=False 0=False Enable using current reference from
1=True other IEDs instead of stand-alone
Operate time accuracy in IDMT mode 3) ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
-3 dB at f = 13 × fn
1) Fundamental frequency current = 1.0 × In. Harmonics current before fault = 0.0 × In, harmonics fault
current 2.0 × Start value. Results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurement.
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 2...20
4.2.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE Po>-> 32N
GUID-EDE21448-13FD-44E3-AF7C-CFD47A5C99DC V1 EN
4.2.6.3 Functionality
The wattmetric earth-fault protection function WPWDE can be used to detect earth
faults in unearthed networks, compensated networks (Petersen coil-earthed
networks) or networks with a high-impedance earthing. It can be used as an
alternative solution to the traditional residual current-based earth-fault protection
functions, for example, the IoCos mode in the directional earth-fault protection
function DEFxPDEF.
WPWDE measures the earth-fault power 3UoIoCosφ and gives an operating signal
when the residual current Io, residual voltage Uo and the earth-fault power exceed
the set limits and the angle (φ) between the residual current and the residual
voltage is inside the set operating sector, that is, forward or backward sector. The
operating time characteristic can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or a
special wattmetric-type inverse definite minimum type (wattmetric type IDMT).
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
Io Timer
Directional Level
OPERATE
calculation detector t
Uo
RCA_CTL
Residual t
power START
calculation
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-2E3B73F0-DB0D-4E84-839F-8E12D6528EEC V1 EN
Directional calculation
The Directional calculation module monitors the angle between the operating
quantity (residual current) and polarizing quantity (residual voltage). The operating
quantity can be selected with the setting Io signal Sel. The selectable options are
“Measured Io” and “Calculated Io”. Calculated residual voltage is used for
polarizing quantity. When the angle between operating quantity and polarizing
quantity after considering the Characteristic angle setting is in the operation sector,
the module sends an enabling signal to Level detector. The directional operation is
selected with the Directional mode setting. Either the “Forward” or “Reverse”
operation mode can be selected. The direction of fault is calculated based on the
phase angle difference between the operating quantity and polarizing quantity, and
the value (ANGLE) is available in the monitored data view.
GUID-A665FD59-1AD1-40B0-9741-A5DBFD0D0F2E V1 EN
The phase angle difference is calculated based on the Characteristic angle setting
(also known as Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) or Relay Base Angle or
Maximum Torque Angle (MTA)). The Characteristic angle setting is done based
on the method of earthing employed in the network. For example, in case of an
unearthed network, the Characteristic angle setting is set to -90°, and in case of a
compensated network, the Characteristic angle setting is set to 0°. In general,
Characteristic angle is selected so that it is close to the expected fault angle value,
which results in maximum sensitivity. Characteristic angle can be set anywhere
between -179° to +180°. Thus, the effective phase angle (ϕ) for calculating the
residual power considering characteristic angle is according to the equation.
In addition, the characteristic angle can be changed via the control signal
RCA_CTL. The RCA_CTL input is used in the compensated networks where the
compensation coil sometimes is temporarily disconnected. When the coil is
disconnected, the compensated network becomes isolated and the Characteristic
angle setting must be changed. This can be done automatically with the RCA_CTL
input, which results in the addition of -90° in the Characteristic angle setting.
RCA = -90˚
GUID-AA58DBE0-CBFC-4820-BA4A-195A11FE273B V1 EN
The fault direction is also indicated FAULT_DIR (available in the monitored data
view), which indicates 0 if a fault is not detected, 1 for faults in the forward
direction and 2 for faults in the backward direction.
The direction of the fault is detected only when the correct angle calculation can be
made. If the magnitude of the operating quantity or polarizing quantity is not high
enough, the direction calculation is not reliable. Hence, the magnitude of the
operating quantity is compared to the Min operate current setting and the
magnitude of the polarizing quantity is compared to Min operate voltage, and if
both the operating quantity and polarizing quantity are higher than their respective
limit, a valid angle is calculated and the residual power calculation module is enabled.
The Correction angle setting can be used to improve the selectivity when there are
inaccuracies due to the measurement transformer. The setting decreases the
operation sector. The Correction angle setting should be done carefully as the
phase angle error of the measurement transformer varies with the connected burden
as well as with the magnitude of the actual primary current that is being measured.
An example of how Correction angle alters the operating region is as shown:
Io (Operating quantity)
Forward Forward
Zero torque line area area
Minimum
operate current
Backward Backward
area area
GUID-B420E2F4-8293-4330-A7F3-9A002940F2A4 V1 EN
Level detector
Level detector compares the magnitudes of the measured operating quantity,
polarizing quantity and calculated residual power to the set Current start value ,
Voltage start value and Power start value respectively. When all three quantities
exceed the limits, Level detector enables the Timer module.
Timer
Once activated, Timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
wattmetric IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate
delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time
curve, the OPERATE output is activated. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a
fault suddenly disappears before the operating delay is exceeded, the timer reset
state is activated. The reset time is identical for both DT or wattmeter IDMT. The
reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting.
Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the “Freeze timers”
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the “Block all” mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the “Block OPERATE
output” mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
In the wattmetric IDMT mode, the OPERATE output is activated based on the
timer characteristics:
k * Pref
t[ s ] =
Pcal
GUID-FEA556F2-175E-4BDD-BD0F-52E9F5499CA8 V2 EN (Equation 21)
GUID-D2ABEA2C-B0E3-4C60-8E70-404E7C62C5FC V1 EN
Figure 146: Operation time curves for wattmetric IDMT for Sref set at 0.15 xPn
The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and
"Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode
setting.
4.2.6.7 Application
The wattmetric method is one of the commonly used directional methods for
detecting the earth faults especially in compensated networks. The protection uses
the residual power component 3UoIoCosφ (φ is the angle between the polarizing
quantity and operating quantity compensated with a relay characteristic angle).
Io (Operating quantity)
Forward
area
Uo
GUID-4E73135C-CEEF-41DE-8091-9849C167C701 V1 EN
In a fully compensated radial network with two outgoing feeders, the earth-fault
currents depend mostly on the system earth capacitances (C0) of the lines and the
compensation coil (L). If the coil is tuned exactly to the system capacitance, the
fault current has only a resistive component. This is due to the resistances of the
coil and distribution lines together with the system leakage resistances (R0). Often
a resistor (RL) in parallel with the coil is used for increasing the fault current.
When a single phase-to-earth fault occurs, the capacitance of the faulty phase is
bypassed and the system becomes unsymmetrical. The fault current is composed of
the currents flowing through the earth capacitances of two healthy phases. The
protection relay in the healthy feeder tracks only the capacitive current flowing
through its earth capacitances. The capacitive current of the complete network
(sum of all feeders) is compensated with the coil.
A B C ΣI01
- U0
C0 R0
ΣI01
ICfd
ΣI02
L RL - U0
U0
IL
Ictot = Ief ΣI02
GUID-A524D89C-35D8-4C07-ABD6-3A6E21AF890E V1 EN
The wattmetric function is activated when the residual active power component
exceeds the set limit. However, to ensure a selective operation it is also required
that the residual current and residual voltage also exceed the set limit.
It is highly recommended that core balance current transformers are used for
measuring Io when using the wattmetric method. When a low transformation ratio
is used, the current transformer can suffer accuracy problems and even a distorted
secondary current waveform with some core balance current transformers.
Therefore, to ensure a sufficient accuracy of the residual current measurement and
consequently a better selectivity of the scheme, the core balance current
transformer should preferably have a transformation ratio of at least 70:1. Lower
transformation ratios such as 50:1 or 50:5 are not recommended, unless the phase
displacement errors and current transformer amplitude are checked first.
The relay characteristic angle needs to be set based on the system earthing. In an
unearthed network, that is, when the network is only coupled to earth via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the characteristic angle is
chosen as -90º.
In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and inductive resonance coil
current compensate each other, meaning that the fault current is mainly resistive
and has zero phase shift compared to the residual voltage. In such networks, the
characteristic angle is chosen as 0º. Often the magnitude of an active component is
small and must be increased by means of a parallel resistor in a compensation coil.
In networks where the neutral point is earthed through a low resistance, the
characteristic angle is always 0º.
As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the earth-fault protection is achieved with time coordination.
The use of wattmetric protection gives a possibility to use the dedicated inverse
definite minimum time characteristics. This is applicable in large high-impedance
earthed networks with a large capacitive earth-fault current.
4.2.6.8 Signals
Table 259: WPWDE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0=False Relay characteristic angle control
4.2.6.9 Settings
Table 261: WPWDE Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode 2=Forward 2=Forward Directional mode
3=Reverse
Current start value 0.010...5.000 xIn 0.001 0.010 Minimum operate residual current for
deciding fault direction
Voltage start value 0.010...1.000 xUn 0.001 0.010 Start value for residual voltage
Table continues on next page
1) Io varied during the test. Uo = 1.0 × Un = phase to earth voltage during earth fault in compensated
or un-earthed network. The residual power value before fault = 0.0 pu, fn = 50 Hz, results based on
statistical distribution of 1000 measurement.
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact.
4.3.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC I2> 46
protection
A070758 V1 EN
4.3.1.3 Functionality
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
A070660 V1 EN
Level detector
The measured negative-sequence current is compared to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector activates the timer
module. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the set Start value is multiplied by the
set Start value Mult.
The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of the settings exceeds the Start value setting range.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.
If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"
causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.
The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.
The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.
The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
4.3.1.5 Application
Since the negative sequence current quantities are not present during normal,
balanced load conditions, the negative sequence overcurrent protection elements
can be set for faster and more sensitive operation than the normal phase-
overcurrent protection for fault conditions occurring between two phases. The
negative sequence overcurrent protection also provides a back-up protection
functionality for the feeder earth-fault protection in solid and low resistance
earthed networks.
The most common application for the negative sequence overcurrent protection is
probably rotating machines, where negative sequence current quantities indicate
unbalanced loading conditions (unsymmetrical voltages). Unbalanced loading
normally causes extensive heating of the machine and can result in severe damages
even over a relatively short time period.
Multiple time curves and time multiplier settings are also available for coordinating
with other devices in the system.
4.3.1.6 Signals
Table 265: NSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
4.3.1.7 Settings
Table 267: NSPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.01...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.30 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
1) Negative sequence current before fault = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of
1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5...20
4.3.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC I2/I1> 46PD
A070688 V1 EN
4.3.2.3 Functionality
The function starts and operates when the unbalance current I2/I1 exceeds the set
limit. To prevent faulty operation at least one phase current needs to be above the
minimum level. PDNSPTOC operates with DT characteristic.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
A070687 V2 EN
I2/I1
The I2/I1 module calculates the ratio of the negative and positive sequence current.
It reports the calculated value to the level detector.
Level detector
The level detector compares the calculated ratio of the negative- and positive-
sequence currents to the set Start value. If the calculated value exceeds the set Start
value and the min current check module has exceeded the value of Min phase
current, the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the timer.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set
by Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
4.3.2.5 Application
IECA070698 V1 EN
Figure 153: Three-phase current quantities during the broken conductor fault in
phase A with the ratio of negative-sequence and positive-sequence
currents
4.3.2.6 Signals
Table 272: PDNSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current
4.3.2.7 Settings
Table 274: PDNSPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 10...100 % 1 10 Start value
Operate delay time 100...30000 ms 1 100 Operate delay time
4.4.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3U> 59
GUID-871D07D7-B690-48FD-8EA1-73A7169AE8BD V2 EN
4.4.1.3 Functionality
PHPTOV includes both definite time (DT) and inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT) characteristics for the delay of the trip.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
Blocking t
BLOCK
logic
GUID-D71B1772-3503-4150-B3FE-6FFD92DE5DB7 V2 EN
Level detector
The fundamental frequency component of the measured three-phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set value of the Start value setting. If the measured
value is higher than the set value of the Start value setting, the level detector
enables the phase selection logic module. The Relative hysteresis setting can be
used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly differs from
the Start value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition has to
be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the
hysteresis area.
For the voltage IDMT operation mode, the used IDMT curve equations contain
discontinuity characteristics. The Curve Sat relative setting is used for preventing
undesired operation.
For a more detailed description of the IDMT curves and the use of
the Curve Sat Relative setting, see the IDMT curve saturation of the
over voltage protection section in this manual.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the set Operating curve type, the time characteristics are selected according to DT
or IDMT.
When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the
DT mode or the maximum value defined by the IDMT, the OPERATE output is
activated.
If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the reset state is activated. The behavior in the drop-off situation
depends on the selected operate time characteristics. If the DT characteristics are
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. If the
drop-off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time, the timer is reset and the
START output is deactivated.
When the IDMT operate time curve is selected, the functionality of the timer in the
drop-off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve and Reset
delay time settings.
Table 278: The reset time functionality when the IDMT operate time curve is selected
Type of reset curve Description of operation
“Immediate” The operate timer is reset instantaneously when
drop-off occurs
“Def time reset” The operate timer is frozen during drop-off.
Operate timer is reset after the set Reset delay
time is exceeded
“DT Lin decr rst” The operate timer value linearly decreases
during the drop-off situation. The operate timer is
reset after the set Reset delay time is exceeded
GUID-504A5E09-8D82-4B57-9B3A-2BAE7F84FC0D V2 EN
Figure 156: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. The value for Type of
reset curve is “Def time reset”. Also other reset modes are
presented for the time integrator.
The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.
The Minimum operate time setting parameter defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is
preselected with the global Blocking mode setting.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
4.4.1.6 Application
Overvoltage in a network occurs either due to the transient surges on the network
or due to prolonged power frequency overvoltages. Surge arresters are used to
protect the network against the transient overvoltages, but the IED protection
function is used to protect against power frequency overvoltages.
The power frequency overvoltage may occur in the network due to contingencies
such as:
• The defective operation of the automatic voltage regulator when the generator
is in isolated operation.
• Operation under manual control with the voltage regulator out of service. A
sudden variation of load, in particular the reactive power component, gives rise
to a substantial change in voltage because of the inherent large voltage
regulation of a typical alternator.
• Sudden loss of load due to the tripping of outgoing feeders, leaving the
generator isolated or feeding a very small load. This causes a sudden rise in the
terminal voltage due to the trapped field flux and overspeed.
4.4.1.7 Signals
Table 280: PHPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase
voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage B or phase to phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage C or phase to phase
voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
4.4.1.8 Settings
Table 282: PHPTOV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...1.60 xUn 0.01 1.10 Start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...300000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 5=ANSI Def. Time 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Inv. Curve A
18=Inv. Curve B
19=Inv. Curve C
20=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
-1=DT Lin decr rst
1) Start value = 1.0 × Un, Voltage before fault = 0.9 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, overvoltage in one phase-to-
phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 1.20 × Un, Start value multiples in range of 1.10... 2.00
4.4.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 3U< 27
GUID-B4A78A17-67CA-497C-B2F1-BC4F1DA415B6 V2 EN
4.4.2.3 Functionality
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
GUID-21DCE3FD-C5A0-471A-AB93-DDAB4AE93116 V1 EN
Level detector
The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set Start value. If the measured value is lower than the
set value of the Start value setting, the level detector enables the phase selection
logic module. The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing
unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly varies above or below the Start
value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled
again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting the phase-to-earth or phase-to-
phase voltages for protection.
For the voltage IDMT mode of operation, the used IDMT curve equations contain
discontinuity characteristics. The Curve Sat relative setting is used for preventing
unwanted operation.
The level detector contains a low-level blocking functionality for cases where one
of the measured voltages is below the desired level. This feature is useful when
unnecessary starts and operates are wanted to avoid during, for example, an
autoreclose sequence. The low-level blocking is activated by default (Enable block
value is set to "True") and the blocking level can be set with the Voltage block
value setting.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the set Operating curve type, the time characteristics are selected according to DT
or IDMT.
When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the
DT mode or the maximum value defined by the IDMT, the OPERATE output is
activated.
If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the reset state is activated. The behavior in the drop-off situation
depends on the selected operate time characteristics. If the DT characteristics are
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. If the
drop-off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time, the timer is reset and the
START output is deactivated.
When the IDMT operate time curve is selected, the functionality of the timer in the
drop-off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve and Reset
delay time settings.
Table 287: The reset time functionality when the IDMT operate time curve is selected
Type of reset curve Description of operation
“Immediate” The operate timer is reset instantaneously when
drop-off occurs
“Def time reset” The operate timer is frozen during drop-off.
Operate timer is reset after the set Reset delay
time is exceeded
“DT Lin decr rst” The operate timer value linearly decreases
during the drop-off situation. The operate timer is
reset after the set Reset delay time is exceeded
Example
GUID-111E2F60-2BFC-4D9B-B6C3-473F7689C142 V2 EN
Figure 159: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. The value for Type of
reset curve is “Def time reset”. Also other reset modes are
presented for the time integrator.
The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.
The Minimum operate time setting parameter defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is
preselected with the global Blocking mode setting.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
4.4.2.6 Application
PHPTUV can be used to disconnect from the network devices, such as electric
motors, which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage
conditions. PHPTUV deals with low voltage conditions at power system frequency.
Low voltage conditions can be caused by:
• Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or incorrect settings under manual
control (symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Short circuits, often as phase-to-earth faults (unsymmetrical voltage increase).
PHPTUV prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could
cause overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases,
PHPTUV is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes
in the power system.
4.4.2.7 Signals
Table 289: PHPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase
voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage B or phase to phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage C or phase to phase
voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
4.4.2.8 Settings
Table 291: PHPTUV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.90 Start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 60...300000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 5=ANSI Def. Time 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
15=IEC Def. Time
21=Inv. Curve A
22=Inv. Curve B
23=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
-1=DT Lin decr rst
1) Start value = 1.0 × Un, Voltage before fault = 1.1 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, undervoltage in one phase-to-
phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Minimum Start value = 0.50, Start value multiples in range of 0.90...0.20
4.4.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV Uo> 59G
A070766 V3 EN
4.4.3.3 Functionality
The function starts when the residual voltage exceeds the set limit. ROVPTOV
operates with the definite time (DT) characteristic.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
A070748 V2 EN
Level detector
The residual voltage is compared to the set Start value. If the value exceeds the set
Start value, the level detector sends an enable signal to the timer. The residual
voltage can be selected with the Uo signal Sel setting. The options are "Measured
Uo" and "Calculated Uo". If "Measured Uo" is selected, the voltage ratio for Uo-
channel is given in the global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage
(Uo,VT). If "Calculated Uo" is selected, the voltage ratio is obtained from phase-
voltage channels given in the global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage
(3U,VT).
Example 2: Uo is calculated from the phase quantities. The phase VT-ratio is 20/
sqrt(3) kV : 100/sqrt(3) V. In this case, "Calculated Uo" is selected. The nominal
value for residual voltage is obtained from the VT ratios entered in Residual
voltage Uo: Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3U,VT): 20.000kV : 100V.
The residual voltage start value of 1.0 × Un corresponds to 1.0 × 20.000 kV =
20.000 kV in the primary.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set
by Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
4.4.3.5 Application
In compensated and isolated neutral systems, the system neutral voltage, that is, the
residual voltage, increases in case of any fault connected to earth. Depending on
the type of the fault and the fault resistance, the residual voltage reaches different
values. The highest residual voltage, equal to the phase-to-earth voltage, is
achieved for a single-phase earth fault. The residual voltage increases
approximately the same amount in the whole system and does not provide any
guidance in finding the faulty component. Therefore, this function is often used as
a backup protection or as a release signal for the feeder earth-fault protection.
The protection can also be used for the earth-fault protection of generators and
motors and for the unbalance protection of capacitor banks.
The residual voltage can be calculated internally based on the measurement of the
three-phase voltage. This voltage can also be measured by a single-phase voltage
transformer, located between a transformer star point and earth, or by using an open-
delta connection of three single-phase voltage transformers.
4.4.3.6 Signals
Table 296: ROVPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
4.4.3.7 Settings
Table 298: ROVPTOV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...1.000 xUn 0.001 0.030 Residual overvoltage start value
Operate delay time 40...300000 ms 1 40 Operate delay time
1) Residual voltage before fault = 0.0 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, residual voltage with nominal frequency injected
from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
4.4.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV U2> 47O-
protection
GUID-F94BCCE8-841F-405C-B659-3EF26F959557 V1 EN
4.4.4.3 Functionality
The function starts when the negative sequence voltage exceeds the set limit.
NSPTOV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
GUID-0014077D-EEA8-4781-AAC7-AFDBAAF415F4 V1 EN
Level detector
The calculated negative-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value setting.
If the value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector enables the timer.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated if the overvoltage condition persists.
If the negative-sequence voltage normalizes before the module operates, the reset
timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the
operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
4.4.4.5 Application
A continuous or temporary voltage unbalance can appear in the network for various
reasons. The voltage unbalance mainly occurs due to broken conductors or
asymmetrical loads and is characterized by the appearance of a negative-sequence
component of the voltage. In rotating machines, the voltage unbalance results in a
current unbalance, which heats the rotors of the machines. The rotating machines,
therefore, do not tolerate a continuous negative-sequence voltage higher than
typically 1-2 percent x Un.
If the machines have an unbalance protection of their own, the NSPTOV operation
can be applied as a backup protection or it can be used as an alarm. The latter can
be applied when it is not required to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better
than the rotating machines.
An appropriate value for the setting parameter Voltage start value is approximately
3 percent of Un. A suitable value for the setting parameter Operate delay time
depends on the application. If the NSPTOV operation is used as backup protection,
the operate time should be set in accordance with the operate time of NSPTOC
used as main protection. If the NSPTOV operation is used as main protection, the
operate time should be approximately one second.
4.4.4.6 Signals
Table 303: NSPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
4.4.4.7 Settings
Table 305: NSPTOV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...1.000 xUn 0.001 0.030 Start value
Operate delay time 40...120000 ms 1 40 Operate delay time
1) Negative-sequence voltage before fault = 0.0 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, negative-sequence overvoltage with
nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of
1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
4.4.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Positive-sequence undervoltage PSPTUV U1< 47U+
protection
GUID-24EBDE8B-E1FE-47B0-878B-EBEC13A27CAC V1 EN
4.4.5.3 Functionality
The function starts when the positive-sequence voltage drops below the set limit.
PSPTUV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
GUID-F1E58B1E-03CB-4A3C-BD1B-F809420397ED V1 EN
Level detector
The calculated positive-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value setting.
If the value drops below the set Start value, the level detector enables the timer.
The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations
if the input signal slightly varies from the Start value setting. After leaving the
hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated if the undervoltage condition persists.
If the positive-sequence voltage normalizes before the module operates, the reset
timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the
operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
4.4.5.5 Application
PSPTUV can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded
generation when network faults like short circuits or phase-to-earth faults in a
transmission or a distribution line cause a potentially dangerous situations for the
power station. A network fault can be dangerous for the power station for various
reasons. The operation of the protection can cause an islanding condition, also
called a loss-of-mains condition, in which a part of the network, that is, an island
fed by the power station, is isolated from the rest of the network. There is then a
risk of an autoreclosure taking place when the voltages of different parts of the
network do not synchronize, which is a straining incident for the power station.
Another risk is that the generator can lose synchronism during the network fault. A
sufficiently fast trip of the utility circuit breaker of the power station can avoid
these risks.
The lower the three-phase symmetrical voltage of the network is, the higher is the
probability that the generator loses the synchronism. The positive-sequence voltage
is also available during asymmetrical faults. It is a more appropriate criterion for
detecting the risk of loss of synchronism than, for example, the lowest phase-to-
phase voltage.
Motor stalling and failure to start can lead to a continuous undervoltage. The positive-
sequence undervoltage is used as a backup protection against the motor stall
condition.
4.4.5.6 Signals
Table 310: PSPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase sequence voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
4.4.5.7 Settings
Table 312: PSPTUV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...1.200 xUn 0.001 0.500 Start value
Operate delay time 40...120000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Voltage block value 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.20 Internal blocking level
Enable block value 0=False 1=True Enable Internal Blocking
1=True
1) Start value = 1.0 × Un, Positive sequence voltage before fault = 1.1 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, positive
sequence undervoltage with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on
statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
4.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Frequency protection FRPFRQ f>/f<, df/dt 81O/81U, 81R
GUID-744529D8-E976-4AFD-AA77-85D6ED2C3B70 V1 EN
4.5.3 Functionality
The frequency protection FRPFRQ is used to protect network components against
abnormal frequency conditions.
OPERATE
Freq>/< START
F
detection
OPR_OFRQ
Operate OPR_UFRQ
logic ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
df/dt
dF/dt
detection OPR_FRG
ST_FRG
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-76692C3F-8B09-4C69-B598-0288CB946300 V1 EN
Freq>/< detection
The frequency detection module includes an overfrequency or underfrequency
detection based on the Operation mode setting.
In the “Freq>” mode, the measured frequency is compared to the set Start value
Freq>. If the measured value exceeds the set value of the Start value Freq>
setting, the module reports the exceeding of the value to the operate logic module.
In the “Freq<” mode, the measured frequency is compared to the set Start value
Freq<. If the measured value is lower than the set value of the Start value Freq<
setting, the module reports the value to the operate logic module.
df/dt detection
The frequency gradient detection module includes a detection for a positive or
negative rate-of-change (gradient) of frequency based on the set Start value df/dt
value. The negative rate-of-change protection is selected when the set value is
negative. The positive rate-of-change protection is selected when the set value is
positive. When the frequency gradient protection is selected and the gradient
exceeds the set Start value df/dt value, the module reports the exceeding of the
value to the operate logic module.
The IED does not accept the set value "0.00" for the Start value df/
dt setting.
Operate logic
This module is used for combining different protection criteria based on the
frequency and the frequency gradient measurement to achieve a more sophisticated
behavior of the function. The criteria are selected with the Operation mode setting.
The module calculates the start duration value which indicates the percentage ratio
of the start situation and set operate time (DT). The start duration is available
according to the selected value of the Operation mode setting.
Freq> ST_DUR_OFRQ
df/dt ST_DUR_FRG
The combined start duration START_DUR indicates the maximum percentage ratio
of the active protection modes. The values are available via the Monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
4.5.5 Application
The frequency protection function uses the positive phase-sequence voltage to
measure the frequency reliably and accurately.
The system frequency stability is one of the main principles in the distribution and
transmission network maintenance. To protect all frequency-sensitive electrical
apparatus in the network, the departure from the allowed band for a safe operation
should be inhibited.
The overfrequency protection is applicable in all situations where high levels of the
fundamental frequency of a power system voltage must be reliably detected. The
high fundamental frequency in a power system indicates an unbalance between
production and consumption. In this case, the available generation is too large
compared to the power demanded by the load connected to the power grid. This
can occur due to a sudden loss of a significant amount of load or due to failures in
the turbine governor system. If the situation continues and escalates, the power
system loses its stability.
The frequency gradient is applicable in all the situations where the change of the
fundamental power system voltage frequency should be detected reliably. The
frequency gradient can be used for both increasing and decreasing the frequencies.
This function provides an output signal suitable for load shedding, generator
shedding, generator boosting, set point change in sub-transmission DC systems and
gas turbine startup. The frequency gradient is often used in combination with a low
frequency signal, especially in smaller power systems where the loss of a large
generator requires quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity. In
such situations, the load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency
level. However, in combination with a large negative frequency gradient, the
underfrequency protection can be used at a high setting.
4.5.6 Signals
Table 319: FRPFRQ Input signals
Name Type Default Description
F SIGNAL 0 Measured frequency
dF/dt SIGNAL 0 Rate of change of frequency
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
4.5.7 Settings
Table 321: FRPFRQ Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation mode 1=Freq< 1=Freq< Frequency protection operation mode
2=Freq> selection
3=df/dt
4=Freq< + df/dt
5=Freq> + df/dt
6=Freq< OR df/dt
7=Freq> OR df/
dt
Start value Freq> 0.900...1.200 xFn 0.001 1.050 Frequency start value overfrequency
Start value Freq< 0.800...1.100 xFn 0.001 0.950 Frequency start value underfrequency
Start value df/dt -0.200...0.200 xFn /s 0.005 0.010 Frequency start value rate of change
Operate Tm Freq 80...200000 ms 10 200 Operate delay time for frequency
Operate Tm df/dt 120...200000 ms 10 400 Operate delay time for frequency rate of
change
4.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC MAP MAP
GUID-A842A2C8-0188-4E01-8490-D00F7D1D8719 V2 EN
4.6.3 Functionality
The multipurpose protection function MAPGAPC is used as a general protection
with many possible application areas as it has flexible measuring and setting
facilities. The function can be used as an under- or overprotection with a settable
absolute hysteresis limit. The function operates with the definite time (DT)
characteristics.
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-50AA4A14-7379-43EB-8FA0-6C20C12097AC V1 EN
Level detector
The level detector compares AI_VALUE to the Start value setting. The Operation
mode setting defines the direction of the level detector.
The Absolute hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations
if the input signal is slightly above or below the Start value setting. After leaving
the hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area. If the ENA_ADD input
is activated, the threshold value of the internal comparator is the sum of the Start
value Add and Start value settings. The resulting threshold value for the
comparator can be increased or decreased depending on the sign and value of the
Start value Add setting.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the starting condition disappears
before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches
the value set by Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the START output
is deactivated.
The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE
output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.
4.6.5 Application
The function block can be used for any general analog signal protection, either
underprotection or overprotection. The setting range is wide, allowing various
protection schemes for the function. Thus, the absolute hysteresis can be set to a
value that suits the application.
The temperature protection using the RTD sensors can be done using the function
block. The measured temperature can be fed from the RTD sensor to the function
input that detects too high temperatures in the motor bearings or windings, for
example. When the ENA_ADD input is enabled, the threshold value of the internal
comparator is the sum of the Start value Add and Start value settings. This allows a
temporal increase or decrease of the level detector depending on the sign and value
of the Start value Add setting, for example, when the emergency start is activated.
If, for example, Start value is 100, Start value Add is 20 and the ENA_ADD input is
active, the input signal needs to rise above 120 before MAPGAPC operates.
4.6.6 Signals
Table 326: MAPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
AI_VALUE FLOAT32 0.0 Analogue input value
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_ADD BOOLEAN 0=False Enable start added
4.6.7 Settings
Table 328: MAPGAPC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value -10000.0...10000.0 0.1 0.0 Start value
Start value Add -100.0...100.0 0.1 0.0 Start value Add
Operate delay time 0...200000 ms 100 0 Operate delay time
5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 3I2f> 68
A070377 V1 EN
5.1.3 Functionality
The transformer inrush detection INRPHAR is used to coordinate transformer
inrush situations in distribution networks.
Transformer inrush detection is based on the following principle: the output signal
BLK2H is activated once the numerically derived ratio of second harmonic current
I_2H and the fundamental frequency current I_1H exceeds the set value.
The operate time characteristic for the function is of definite time (DT) type.
A070694 V2 EN
Figure 171: Functional module diagram. I_1H and I_2H represent fundamental
and second harmonic values of phase currents.
I_2H/I_1H
This module calculates the ratio of the second harmonic (I_2H) and fundamental
frequency (I_1H) phase currents. The calculated value is compared to the set Start
value. If the calculated value exceeds the set Start value, the module output is
activated.
Level detector
The output of the phase specific level detector is activated when the fundamental
frequency current I_1H exceeds five percent of the nominal current.
Timer
Once activated, the timer runs until the set Operate delay time value. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the
Operate delay time value, the BLK2H output is activated. After the timer has
elapsed and the inrush situation still exists, the BLK2H signal remains active until
the I_2H/I_1H ratio drops below the value set for the ratio in all phases, that is,
until the inrush situation is over. If the drop-off situation occurs within the operate
time up counting, the reset timer is activated. If the drop-off time exceeds Reset
delay time, the operate timer is reset.
5.1.5 Application
Transformer protections require high stability to avoid tripping during magnetizing
inrush conditions. A typical example of an inrush detector application is doubling
the start value of an overcurrent protection during inrush detection.
The inrush detection function can be used to selectively block overcurrent and earth-
fault function stages when the ratio of second harmonic component over the
fundamental component exceeds the set value.
A070695 V4 EN
5.1.6 Signals
Table 332: INRPHAR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_2H_A SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase A current
I_1H_A SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase A current
I_2H_B SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase B current
I_1H_B SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase B current
I_2H_C SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase C current
I_1H_C SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status
5.1.7 Settings
Table 334: INRPHAR Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 5...100 % 1 20 Ratio of the 2. to the 1. harmonic leading
to restraint
Operate delay time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Operate delay time
Current measurement:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
Ratio I2f/I1f measurement:
±5.0% of the set value
Reset time +35 ms / -0 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Operate time accuracy +35 ms / -0 ms
5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF
A070436 V4 EN
5.2.3 Functionality
The breaker failure function CCBRBRF is activated by trip commands from the
protection functions. The commands are either internal commands to the terminal
or external commands through binary inputs. The start command is always a
default for three-phase operation. CCBRBRF includes a three-phase conditional or
unconditional re-trip function, and also a three-phase conditional back-up trip
function.
CCBRBRF uses the same levels of current detection for both re-trip and back-up
trip. The operating values of the current measuring elements can be set within a
predefined setting range. The function has two independent timers for trip
purposes: a re-trip timer for the repeated tripping of its own breaker and a back-up
timer for the trip logic operation for upstream breakers. A minimum trip pulse
length can be set independently for the trip output.
The operation of the breaker failure protection can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Also
further information on the retrip and backup trip logics is given in sub-module
diagrams.
I_A Level
I_B detector
I_C 1
Timer 1
POSCLOSE Start t Retrip
TRRET
START logic logic
Timer 2
Level Back-up
Io detector t trip TRBU
2 logic
Timer 3
CB_FAULT t CB_FAULT_AL
BLOCK
A070445 V3 EN
Figure 174: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase
currents and Io residual current.
Level detector 1
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Current value. If
the measured value exceeds the set Current value, the level detector reports the
exceeding of the value to the start, retrip and backup trip logics. The parameter
should be set low enough so that breaker failure situations with small fault current
or high load current can be detected. The setting can be chosen in accordance with
the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker failure protection.
Level detector 2
The measured residual current is compared to the set Current value Res. If the
measured value exceeds the set Current value Res, the level detector reports the
exceeding of the value to the start and backup trip logics. In high-impedance
Start logic
The start logic is used to manage the starting of the timer 1 and timer 2. It also
resets the function after the circuit breaker failure is handled. On the rising edge of
the START input, the enabling signal is send to the timer 1 and timer 2.
Function resetting is prevented during the next 150 ms. The 150 ms time elapse is
provided to prevent malfunctioning due to oscillation in the starting signal.
In case the setting Start latching mode is set to "Level sensitive", the CCBRBRF is
reset immediately after the START signal is deactivated. The recommended setting
value is "Rising edge".
I0 >
From Level detector 2
I>
From Level detector 1
I0 >
From Level detector 2
I>
From Level detector 1
AND
Set
POSCLOSE Enable timer
Reset
START
TON
150.0 ms
Timer 1 elapsed
From Timer 1 AND
AND
Timer 2 elapsed
From Timer 2
BLOCK
GUID-61D73737-798D-4BA3-9CF2-56D57719B03D V3 EN
Timer 1
Once activated, the timer runs until the set Retrip time value has elapsed. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value
set with Retrip time, the retrip logic is activated. A typical setting is 0...50 ms.
Timer 2
Once activated, the timer runs until the set CB failure delay value has elapsed. The
time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the
set maximum time value CB failure delay, the backup trip logic is activated. The
value of this setting is made as low as possible at the same time as any unwanted
operation is avoided. A typical setting is 90 - 150 ms, which is also dependent on
the retrip timer.
The minimum time delay for the CB failure delay can be estimated as:
tBFP_reset maximum time for the breaker failure protection to detect the correct breaker function (the
current criteria reset)
tmargin safety margin
It is often required that the total fault clearance time is less than the given critical
time. This time often depends on the ability to maintain transient stability in case of
a fault close to a power plant.
GUID-1A2C47ED-0DCF-4225-9294-2AEC97C14D5E V1 EN
Timer 3
This module is activated by the CB_FAULT signal. Once activated, the timer runs
until the set CB fault delay value has elapsed. The time characteristic is according
to DT. When the operation timer has reached the maximum time value CB fault
delay, the CB_FAULT_AL output is activated. After the set time, an alarm is given
so that the circuit breaker can be repaired. A typical value is 5 s.
Retrip logic
The retrip logic provides the TRRET output, which can be used to give a retrip
signal for the main circuit breaker. Timer 1 activates the retrip logic. The operation
of the retrip logic depends on the CB fail retrip mode setting.
• The retrip logic is inactive if the CB fail retrip mode setting is set to "Off".
•
• If CB fail retrip mode is set to the "Current check" mode, the activation of the
retrip output TRRET depends on the CB failure mode setting.
The activation of the BLOCK input or the CB_FAULT_AL output deactivates the
TRRET output.
Timer 1 elapsed
From Timer 1
AND
CB fail retrip mode
”Without check”
OR
CB fail retrip mode
”Current check” AND TRRET
AND
CB failure mode ”Current”
AND OR
I>
From Level detector 1
POSCLOSE AND
OR
CB_FAULT_AL
From Timer 3
BLOCK
GUID-BD64DEDB-758C-4F53-8287-336E43C750F2 V2 EN
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 3", the failure detection is
based on any of the phase currents exceeding the Current value setting.
Once TRBU is activated, it remains active for the time set with the Trip
pulse time setting or until the values of all the phase currents drop below
the Current value setting, whichever takes longer.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 4", the failure detection is
based on either a phase current or a residual current exceeding the
Current value or Current value Res setting respectively. Once TRBU is
activated, it remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time
setting or until the values of all the phase currents or residual currents
drop below the Current value and Current value Res setting respectively,
whichever takes longer.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "2 out of 4", the failure detection
requires that a phase current and a residual current both exceed the
Current value or Current value Res setting respectively or two phase
currents exceeding the Current value. Once TRBU is activated, it remains
active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values
of all the phase currents drop below the Current value, whichever takes
longer.
• If the CB failure mode is set to "Breaker status", the TRBU output is activated
if the circuit breaker is in the closed position. Once activated, the TRBU output
remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or the time the
circuit breaker is in the closed position, whichever is longer.
• If the CB failure mode setting is set to "Both", TRBU is activated when the
"Breaker status" or "Current" mode conditions are satisfied.
BLOCK
CB_FAULT_AL
From Timer 3
AND
Enable timer
From Start logic
OR
Timer 2 elapsed
From Timer 2 AND TRBU
I> AND
From level detector 1
AND
OR
AND
AND
OR
CB failure mode ”Both” OR
AND
POSCLOSE
CB failure mode ”Breaker
status”
OR
CB failure mode ”Both”
GUID-30BB8C04-689A-4FA5-85C4-1DF5E3ECE179 V3 EN
5.2.5 Application
The n-1 criterion is often used in the design of a fault clearance system. This means
that the fault is cleared even if some component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. A circuit breaker is a necessary component in the fault clearance system.
For practical and economical reasons, it is not feasible to duplicate the circuit
breaker for the protected component, but breaker failure protection is used instead.
The breaker failure function issues a backup trip command to up-stream circuit
breakers in case the original circuit breaker fails to trip for the protected
component. The detection of a failure to break the current through the breaker is
made by measuring the current or by detecting the remaining trip signal
(unconditional).
CCBRBRF can also retrip. This means that a second trip signal is sent to the
protected circuit breaker. The retrip function is used to increase the operational
reliability of the breaker. The function can also be used to avoid backup tripping of
several breakers in case mistakes occur during IED maintenance and tests.
The retrip timer is initiated after the start input is set to true. When the pre-defined
time setting is exceeded, CCBRBRF issues the retrip and sends a trip command,
for example, to the circuit breaker's second trip coil. Both a retrip with current
check and an unconditional retrip are available. When a retrip with current check is
chosen, the retrip is performed only if there is a current flow through the circuit
breaker.
The backup trip timer is also initiated at the same time as the retrip timer. If
CCBRBRF detects a failure in tripping the fault within the set backup delay time,
which is longer than the retrip time, it sends a backup trip signal to the chosen
backup breakers. The circuit breakers are normally upstream breakers which feed
fault current to a faulty feeder.
The backup trip always includes a current check criterion. This means that the
criterion for a breaker failure is that there is a current flow through the circuit
breaker after the set backup delay time.
A070696 V2 EN
5.2.6 Signals
Table 338: CCBRBRF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block CBFP operation
START BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP start command
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False CB in closed position
CB_FAULT BOOLEAN 0=False CB faulty and unable to trip
5.2.7 Settings
Table 340: CCBRBRF Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Current value 0.05...1.00 xIn 0.05 0.30 Operating phase current
Current value Res 0.05...1.00 xIn 0.05 0.30 Operating residual current
CB failure trip mode 1=2 out of 4 1=2 out of 4 Backup trip current check mode
2=1 out of 3
3=1 out of 4
CB failure mode 1=Current 1=Current Operating mode of function
2=Breaker status
3=Both
CB fail retrip mode 1=Off 1=Off Operating mode of retrip logic
2=Without Check
3=Current check
Retrip time 0...60000 ms 10 20 Delay timer for retrip
CB failure delay 0...60000 ms 10 150 Delay timer for backup trip
CB fault delay 0...60000 ms 10 5000 Circuit breaker faulty delay
Measurement mode 2=DFT 2=DFT Phase current measurement mode of
3=Peak-to-Peak function
Trip pulse time 0...60000 ms 10 150 Pulse length of retrip and backup trip
outputs
5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Master trip TRPPTRC Master Trip 94/86
A071286 V2 EN
5.3.3 Functionality
The master trip function TRPPTRC is used as a trip command collector and
handler after the protection functions. The features of this function influence the
trip signal behavior of the circuit breaker. The minimum trip pulse length can be
set when the non-latched mode is selected. It is also possible to select the latched or
lockout mode for the trip signal.
The operation of the tripping logic function can be described with a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
A070882 V4 EN
Timer
The duration of the TRIP output signal from TRPPTRC can be adjusted with the
Trip pulse time setting when the "Non-latched" operation mode is used. The pulse
length should be long enough to secure the opening of the breaker. For three-pole
tripping, TRPPTRC has a single input OPERATE, through which all trip output
signals are routed from the protection functions within the IED, or from external
protection functions via one or more of the IED's binary inputs. The function has a
single trip output TRIP for connecting the function to one or more of the IED's
binary outputs, and also to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
The BLOCK input blocks the TRIP output and resets the timer.
Lockout logic
TRPPTRC is provided with possibilities to activate a lockout. When activated, the
lockout can be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating the
RST_LKOUT input or from the LHMI clear menu parameter. When using the
"Latched" mode, the resetting of the TRIP output can be done similarly as when
using the "Lockout" mode. It is also possible to reset the "Latched" mode remotely
through a separate communication parameter.
The minimum pulse trip function is not active when using the
"Lockout" or "Latched" modes but only when the "Non-latched"
mode is selected.
The CL_LKOUT and TRIP outputs can be blocked with the BLOCK input.
5.3.5 Application
All trip signals from different protection functions are routed through the trip logic.
The most simplified application of the logic function is linking the trip signal and
ensuring that the signal is long enough.
The tripping logic in the protection relay is intended to be used in the three-phase
tripping for all fault types (3ph operating). To prevent the closing of a circuit
breaker after a trip, TRPPTRC can block the CBXCBR closing.
The inputs from the protection functions are connected to the OPERATE input.
Usually, a logic block OR is required to combine the different function outputs to
this input. The TRIP output is connected to the binary outputs on the IO board.
This signal can also be used for other purposes within the IED, for example when
starting the breaker failure protection.
FPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
FDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
FDPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
FEFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
FDEFLPDEF1_OPERATE TRPPTRC1
FDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE BLOCK TRIP
EFPADM1_OPERATE OPERATE CL_LKOUT
EFPADM2_OPERATE X100 PO1
RST_LKOUT
EFPADM3_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE OR
WPWDE3_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV3_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV3_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ1_OPERATE
FRPFRQ2_OPERATE
GUID-8A61B6AD-F056-4B07-8CA2-323DF23D8B94 V1 EN
5.3.6 Signals
Table 345: TRPPTRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=False Operate
RST_LKOUT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function
5.3.7 Settings
Table 347: TRPPTRC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Trip pulse time 20...60000 ms 1 150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
Trip output mode 1=Non-latched 1=Non-latched Select the operation mode for trip output
2=Latched
3=Lockout
5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fault locator function SCEFRFLO FLOC 21FL
GUID-AB1F9A6B-6092-4224-8FCB-F1C5552FF823 V1 EN
5.4.3 Functionality
The fault locator function SCEFRFLO provides impedance-based fault location. It
is designed for radially operated distribution systems. It is applicable for locating
short circuits in all kinds of distribution networks. Earth faults can be located in
effectively earthed and in low-resistance or low-reactance earthed networks. Under
certain limitations, SCEFRFLO can also be applied for an earth-fault location in
unearthed distribution networks.
The function can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are “On" and "Off".
GUID-FB1818E0-0F8D-4CBA-A55F-FC927CDA11C6 V2 EN
Identification of the faulty phases is provided by the built-in Phase Selection Logic
based on combined impedance and current criterion. Phase selection logic is
virtually setting-free and has only one parameter, Z Max phase load, for
discriminating a large symmetrical load from a three-phase fault. The setting Z
Max phase load can be calculated using the equation.
U xy2
Z Max phase load = 0.8 ⋅
S max
GUID-9FFE90C4-0734-46B5-9D17-5A7FA6F723E6 V1 EN (Equation 24)
For example, if Uxy = 20 kV and Smax = 1 MVA, then Z Max phase load = 320.0 Ω.
The identification of the faulty phases is compulsory for the correct operation of
SCEFRFLO. This is because only one of the impedance-measuring elements (fault
loops) provides the correct result for a specific fault type. A three-phase fault is an
exception and theoretically it can be calculated with any of the fault loops. The
fault loop used in the fault distance calculation is indicated in the recorded data Flt
loop as specified in Table 350.
As soon as a fault condition is recognized by the phase selection logic, the fault
distance calculation is started with one of the seven impedance-measuring
elements, that is, the fault loops. SCEFRFLO employs independent algorithms for
each fault type to achieve optimal performance.
The inherent result from the fault distance calculation is the ohmic fault loop
impedance value.
Table 351: The calculated impedance values available in the recorded data
Impedance valule Description
Flt phase reactance Estimated positive sequence reactance from the substation to the fault
location in primary ohms.
Flt point resistance Fault resistance value in the fault spot in primary ohms. The composition of
this term depends on the fault loop as described in the following subsections.
Flt loop resistance The total fault loop resistance from the substation to the fault location in
primary ohms. Fault point resistance is included in this value. The
composition of this term is different for short-circuit and earth-fault loops.
Flt loop reactance The total fault loop reactance from the substation to the fault location in
primary ohms. The composition of this term is different for short-circuit and
earth-faults loops.
These impedance values can be utilized as such or they can be further processed in
system level fault location applications, such as distribution management system
(DMS).
RN Estimated earth return path resistance (= (R0 – R1)/3) from the substation to the
fault location
XN Estimated earth return path reactance (= (X0 – X1)/3) from the substation to the
fault location
Rfault Estimated fault resistance at the fault location
The recorded data Flt phase reactance provides the estimated positive-sequence
reactance from the substation to the fault location.
GUID-B455F553-4F09-442D-9297-4262002D5D07 V2 EN
Figure 185: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-earth fault loops “AG Fault”,
“BG Fault” or “CG Fault”
The “Load modelling” algorithm takes into account the effect of the load in the
measured currents and voltages by considering it in the fault loop model. In case of
radial feeders, this algorithm can be applied with low-impedance/effectively
earthed systems where the fault current is fed from one side only. The “Load
modelling” algorithm has been especially designed for unearthed systems.
The “Load modelling” algorithm requires the Equivalent load Dis setting, that is,
an equivalent load distance, as an additional parameter. The derivation and
meaning of this parameter is illustrated in Figure 186, where the load is assumed to
be evenly distributed along the feeder, resulting in the actual voltage drop curve as
seen in the middle part of Figure 186.
In case of evenly distributed load, Equivalent load Dis ~ 0.5. When the load is
tapped at the end of the feeder, Equivalent load Dis = 1.0. If the load distribution is
unknown, a default value of 0.5 can be used for Equivalent load Dis.
The maximum value of the voltage drop, denoted as Udrop(real), appears at the end
of the feeder. The Equivalent load Dis parameter is the distance at which a single
load tap corresponding to the total load of the feeder would result in a voltage drop
equal to Udrop(real). The dashed curve shows the voltage drop profile in this case.
GUID-134928BF-ACE3-42C9-A70F-985A1913FB75 V2 EN
The exact value for Equivalent load Dis can be calculated based on the load flow
and voltage drop calculations using data from DMS-system and the following
equation.
Another method to calculate Equivalent load Dis is based on load flow and voltage
drop calculations, which are typically taken from a network calculation program.
This method uses a certain equation.
Ud ( real )
Equivalent load Dis =
Ud ( tap,d =1)
GUID-E447E8AC-65F7-4586-B853-C297347303FF V2 EN (Equation 29)
Ud(tap,d=1) The fictional voltage drop, if the entire load would be tapped at the end (d=1) of
the feeder (not drawn in Figure 186). The calculation of this value requires data
from the DMS system.
In addition, when the setting EF algorithm Sel is equal to “Load modelling”, the
EF algorithm Cur Sel setting determines whether zero-sequence “Io based” or
negative-sequence “I2 based” current based algorithm is used. The difference
between “Io based” and “I2 based” methods is that “I2 based” does not require the
Ph capacitive React and Ph leakage Ris settings. In case of “Io based”, these
settings are needed to compensate for the influence of the line-charging
capacitances of the protected feeder. This improves the accuracy of the fault
location estimate when fault resistance is involved in the fault.
Under certain restrictions, the “Load modelling” algorithm can also be applied to
unearthed networks. In this case the EF algorithm Cur Sel setting should be set to
“Io based” and thus Ph capacitive React and Ph leakage Ris settings must be
determined.
Ief ( Rfault =0 )
Flt to Lod Cur ratio =
ILoad
GUID-CABC3779-DAB9-4785-8451-DCCC8EAA034F V2 EN (Equation 30)
This ratio is estimated by SCEFRFLO and stored in the recorded data Flt to Lod
Cur ratio together with the fault distance estimate.
Rfault
Flt point resistance =
2
GUID-F8007C95-5C0B-4FBA-B724-0BC45E64841F V2 EN (Equation 31)
Rfault
Flt loop resistance = R1 +
2
GUID-CB02F4ED-8E75-4C30-BB25-3F4984D75FC8 V2 EN (Equation 32)
GUID-9CBC31C7-4DF6-4555-9029-4188CCC5533C V2 EN
Figure 187: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-phase fault loops (either “AB
Fault”, “BC Fault” or “CA Fault”)
The fault distance calculation algorithm for the phase-to-phase fault loops is
defined by using settings Load Com PP loops and Enable simple model. Options
for the selection are "Disabled" or "Enabled".
Load compensation can be enabled or disabled with setting Load Com PP loops.
The load compensation should be disabled only if the ratio between the fault
current and load current is large or when the value of the fault distance estimate for
the short circuit fault is required from each shot of an autoreclosing sequence.
The fault distance calculation is most accurate when calculated with the fault loop
model. This model requires positive sequence impedances of the protected feeder
to be given as settings. If these settings are not available, valid impedance values
can be calculated also without the fault loop model with setting Enable simple
model = “TRUE”. However, valid distance estimate, that is, the conversion of
measured impedance (‘’electrical fault distance’’) into a physical fault distance
requires accurate positive sequence impedance settings.
GUID-359785B9-1D24-4751-B018-2225F04D7A2F V2 EN
Figure 188: Fault loop impedance for a three-phase fault loop (“ABC Fault”)
The three-phase fault distance is calculated with a special measuring element using
positive-sequence quantities. This is advantageous especially in case of non-
transposed (asymmetric) lines, as the influence of line parameter asymmetry is
reduced. If the line is non-transposed, all the phase-to-phase loops have different
fault loop reactances. The use of positive-sequence quantities results in the average
value of phase-to-phase loop reactances, that is, the most representative estimate in
case of three-phase faults.
The fault distance calculation algorithm for the three-phase fault loop is defined by
using settings Load Com PP loops and Enable simple model. Options for the
selection are "Disabled" or "Enabled".
Load compensation can be enabled or disabled with setting Load Com PP loops.
The load compensation should be disabled only if the ratio between the fault
current and load current is large or when the value of the fault distance estimate for
the short circuit fault is required from each shot of an autoreclosing sequence.
The fault distance calculation is most accurate when the calculation is made with
the fault loop model. This model requires positive sequence impedances of the
protected feeder to be given as settings. If these settings are not available, valid
impedance values can be calculated also without the fault loop model with setting
Enable simple model = “TRUE”. However, valid distance estimate, that is, the
conversion of measured impedance (‘’electrical fault distance’’) into a physical
fault distance requires accurate positive sequence impedance settings.
phases. In case of a three-phase fault, the estimated fault point resistance equals the
total fault point resistance as per phase value, for example, the arc resistance per
phase.
GUID-8C1D00A2-1DFC-4904-B2D5-1CF7A88E9C4D V2 EN
Figure 189: Definition of a physical fault point resistance in different fault loops
Load current is another error source for fault distance calculation. Its influence
increases with higher fault resistance values. SCEFRFLO employs independent
load compensation methods for each fault type to achieve optimal performance.
The purpose of load compensation is to improve the accuracy of the fault distance
calculation models by estimating the actual fault current in the fault location. Delta-
quantities are used for this to mitigate the effect of load current on fault distance
estimation. For earth faults, the load compensation is done automatically inside the
fault distance calculation algorithm. For short circuit faults, load compensation is
enabled with setting Load Com PP loops. The default value is “Enabled”. The
parameter should be set to “Disabled” only if the ratio between the expected fault
current and load current is large or when the fault distance estimate for short circuit
fault is required for each shot of an autoreclosing sequence.
The delta-quantity describes the change in measured signal due to the fault.
xpre-fault Corresponds to the signal value during healthy state just before fault
For example, if fault point resistance exceeds 500 Ω and Flt to Lod Cur ratio is
below 1.0, Flt Dist quality is “36”. As another example, if no error sources are
found, but stability criterion is not met, the value of Flt Dist quality is “2”.
Impedance settings
The fault distance calculation in SCEFRFLO is based on the fault loop impedance
modeling. The fault loop is parametrized with the impedance settings and these can
be set at maximum for three line sections (A, B and C). Each section is enabled by
entering a section length, which differs from zero to settings Line Len section A,
Line Len section B or Line Len section C in the order section A-> section B->
section C.
If the impedance settings are in use, it is important that the settings closely match
the impedances of used conductor types. The impedance settings are given in
primary ohms [ohm/pu] and the line section lengths in per unit [pu]. Thus,
impedances can be either given in ohm/km and section length in km, or ohm/mile
and section length in miles. The resulting Flt distance matches the units entered for
the line section lengths.
The positive-sequence reactance per unit and per phase can be calculated with a
following approximation equation which applies to symmetrically transposed three-
phase aluminium overhead lines without ground wires.
a
X 1 ≈ ωn × 10−4 2 × ln en + 0.5 [Ω / km]
r
GUID-B7F3697A-7C8E-4BF6-A63C-7BFD307DD128 V1 EN (Equation 38)
aen 3
( a12 × a23 × a31 )
GUID-DA850ABF-239A-4AB5-B63B-F0B54557CF2E V1 EN
GUID-40949A85-D97F-4639-9D61-3CAE997D28D3 V2 EN
Table 353: Positive-sequence impedance values for typical 11 kV conductors, “Flat” tower
configuration assumed
Name R1 [Ω/km] X1 [Ω/km]
ACSR 50 SQ.mm 0.532 0.373
ACSR 500 SQ.mm 0.0725 0.270
Table 354: Positive-sequence impedance values for typical 10/20 kV conductors, “Flat” tower
configuration assumed
Name R1 [Ω/km] X1 [Ω/km]
Al/Fe 36/6 Sparrow 0.915 0.383
Al/Fe 54/9 Raven 0.578 0.368
Al/Fe 85/14 Pigeon 0.364 0.354
Al/Fe 93/39 Imatra 0.335 0.344
Al/Fe 108/23 Vaasa 0.287 0.344
Al/Fe 305/39 Duck 0.103 0.314
Table 355: Positive-sequence impedance values for typical 33 kV conductors, “Flat” tower
configuration assumed
Name R1 [Ω/km] X1 [Ω/km]
ACSR 50 sq.mm 0.529 0.444
ACSR 100 sq.mm 0.394 0.434
ACSR 500 sq.mm 0.0548 0.346
The positive-sequence impedance per unit values for the lines are typically known
or can easily be obtained from data sheets. The zero-sequence values are generally
not as easy to obtain as they depend on the actual installation conditions and
configurations. Sufficient accuracy can, however, be obtained with rather simple
calculations using the following equations, which apply per phase for
symmetrically transposed three-phase aluminium overhead lines without ground
wires.
w
X 0 ≈ 2 × ωn × 10−4 3 × ln + 0.25 [Ω / km]
ren
GUID-6850481D-094B-4FA0-9E73-39DCC6C49BCC V1 EN (Equation 41)
W
ρearth
658
fn
GUID-2FE803A9-203E-44ED-8153-4F5903233736 V1 EN
ren
3
r 3 a122 × a23
2 2
× a31
GUID-F7698D7C-ADCC-4555-A3C7-05DAEB3FBA70 V1 EN
GUID-4FEEEF83-D0D7-49A8-90F6-453E28AE27B2 V2 EN
Figure 191: Equivalent diagram of the protected feeder. RL0F = Ph leakage Ris.
If the total phase-to-earth capacitance (including all branches) per phase C0F of the
protected feeder is known, the setting value can be calculated.
1
Ph capacitive React =
(ω n × C0 F )
GUID-3D723613-A007-47ED-B8D7-F9D55C5FBF38 V1 EN (Equation 42)
3 × U xy
Ph capacitive React =
Ief
GUID-60CC60C2-2547-404D-ABEB-74D112142F48 V2 EN (Equation 43)
SCEFRFLO can also determine the value for the Ph capacitive React setting by
measurements. The calculation of Ph capacitive React is triggered by the binary
signal connected to the TRIGG_XC0F input when an earth-fault test is conducted
outside the protected feeder during commissioning, for example, at the substation
busbar. The Calculation Trg mode has to be “External”. After the activation of the
TRIGG_XC0F triggering input, the calculated value for setting Ph capacitive
React is obtained from recorded data as parameter XC0F Calc. This value has to be
manually entered for the Ph capacitive React setting. The calculated value matches
the current switching state of the feeder and thus, if the switching state of the
protected feeder changes, the value should be updated.
GUID-DB04812D-DFF9-4E3F-9CC3-486322E70420 V1 EN
feeders. For example, if the start delay is 100 ms and the shortest operating time
300 ms, a value of 300 ms can be used. Circuit breaker and disconnector status is
used to verify that the entire feeder is measured.
Impedance model with one line section is enabled by setting Line Len section A to
differ from zero. In this case the impedance settings R1 line section A, X1 line
section A, R0 line section A and X0 line section A are used for the fault distance
calculation and for conversion from reactance to physical fault distance. This
option should be used only in the case of a homogeneous line, that is, when the
protected feeder consists of only one conductor type.
Impedance model with two line sections is enabled by setting both Line Len section
A and Line Len section B to differ from zero. In this case the impedance settings R1
line section A, X1 line section A, R0 line section A, X0 line section A, R1 line
section B, X1 line section B, R0 line section B and X0 line section B are used for the
fault distance calculation and for conversion from reactance to physical fault
distance. This option should be used in the case of a non-homogeneous line when
the protected feeder consists of two types of conductors.
Impedance model with three line sections is enabled by setting Line Len section A,
Line Len section B and Line Len section C all differ from zero. In this case the
impedance settings R1 line section A, X1 line section A, R0 line section A, X0 line
section A, R1 line section B, X1 line section B, R0 line section B, X0 line section B,
R1 line section C, X1 line section C, R0 line section C and X0 line section C are
used for the fault distance calculation and for conversion from reactance to
physical fault distance. This option should be used in the case of a non-
homogeneous line when the protected feeder consists of more than two types of
conductors.
GUID-AEA0E874-C871-4C90-82ED-3AFE41D28145 V2 EN
In Figure 193 the feeder is modelled either with one or three line sections with
parameters given in Table 356.
Figure 193 illustrates the conversion error from measured fault loop reactance into
physical fault distance. The fault location is varied from 1 km to 10 km in 1 km
steps (marked with circles). An error of nearly eight per cent at maximum is
created by the conversion procedure when modeling a non-homogenous line with
only one section. By using impedance model with three line sections, there is no
error in the conversion.
The previous example assumed a short circuit fault and thus, only positive-
sequence impedance settings were used. The results, however, also apply for earth
faults.
GUID-312EE60E-1CB9-4334-83BD-39DF3FC5815E V2 EN
fundamental cycle are within “final value ± Distance estimate Va”, the fault
distance estimate (mean of successive estimates) is recorded. In case
stabilization criterion has not been fulfilled, the fault distance estimate is given
just before the phase currents are interrupted. The phase selection logic is a non-
directional function, and thus internal triggering should not be used when
directionality is required.
• Immediately after the fault occurrence, the estimate is affected by initial fault
transients in voltages and currents.
• Approximately one fundamental cycle after the fault occurrence, the fault
distance estimate starts to approach the final value.
• Approximately two fundamental cycles after the fault occurrence, the stability
criterion for fault distance estimate is fulfilled and the TRIGG_OUT event is
sent. The recorded data values are stored at this moment.
GUID-2C1E2C55-B61A-4200-BC8E-0F6FC9036A56 V2 EN
SCEFRFLO contains an alarm output for the calculated fault distance. If the
calculated fault distance FLT_DISTANCE is between the settings Low alarm Dis
limit and High alarm Dis limit, the ALARM output is activated.
The ALARM output can be utilized, for example, in regions with waterways or other
places where knowledge of certain fault locations is of high importance.
GUID-59F4E262-44C8-4EF3-A352-E6358C84C791 V2 EN
All the information required for a later fault analysis is recorded to SCEFRFLO
recorded data. In the IED, recorded data is found in Monitoring/Recorded data/
Other protection/SCEFRFLO.
SCEFRFLO has also monitored data values which are used for the read-out of
continuous calculation values. The cross reference table shows which of the
recorded data values are available as continuous monitoring values during a fault.
Table 357: Cross reference table for recorded and monitored data values
Recorded data Monitored data
Flt loop FAULT_LOOP
Flt distance FLT_DISTANCE
Flt Dist quality FLT_DIST_Q
Flt loop resistance RFLOOP
Flt loop reactance XFLOOP
Flt phase reactance XFPHASE
Flt point resistance RF
Flt to Lod Cur ratio IFLT_PER_ILD
Equivalent load Dis S_CALC
XC0F Calc XC0F_CALC
The full operation of SCEFRFLO requires that all three phase-to-earth voltages are
measured. The voltages can be measured with conventional voltage transformers or
voltage dividers connected between the phase and earth (VT connection is set to
“Wye”). Another alternative is to measure phase-to-phase voltages (VT connection
is set to “Delta”) and residual voltage (Uo). Both alternatives are covered by setting
the configuration parameter Phase voltage Meas to "Accurate".
When the Phase voltage Meas setting is set to "Ph-to-ph without Uo" and only phase-
to-phase voltages are available (but not Uo), only short-circuit measuring loops
(fault loops “AB Fault”, “BC Fault” or “CA Fault” or “ABC Fault”) can be
measured accurately. In this case, the earth-fault loops (fault loops either “AG
Fault”, “BG Fault” or “CG Fault”) cannot provide correct fault distance estimates
and the triggering of the function in case of earth fault is automatically disabled.
5.4.5 Application
The main objective of the feeder terminals is a fast, selective and reliable operation
in faults inside the protected feeder. In addition, information on the distance to the
fault point is very important for those involved in operation and maintenance.
Reliable information on the fault location greatly decreases the downtime of the
protected feeders and increases the total availability of a power system.
Configuration example
A typical configuration example for SCEFRFLO triggering is illustrated in Figure
192 where external triggering is applied, that is, Calculation Trg mode is set to
“External”. The OPERATE signal from non-directional overcurrent function
PHLPTOC is used to provide an indication of a short circuit fault. The OPERATE
signal from the directional earth-fault function DEFLPDEF is used to provide an
indication of an earth fault at the protected feeder.
“Enabled” or, for earth faults, when EF algorithm Sel is set to “Load
compensation” or “Load modelling”.
5.4.6 Signals
Table 358: SCEFRFLO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
TRIGG BOOLEAN 0=False Distance calculation triggering signal
TRIGG_XC0F BOOLEAN 0=False XC0F calculation triggering signal
5.4.7 Settings
Table 360: SCEFRFLO Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
High alarm Dis limit 0.000...1.000 pu 0.001 0.000 High alarm limit for calculated distance
Low alarm Dis limit 0.000...1.000 pu 0.001 0.000 Low alarm limit for calculated distance
Z Max phase load 1.0...10000.0 ohm 0.1 80.0 Impedance per phase of max. load,
overcurr./under-imp., PSL
Ph leakage Ris 20...1000000 ohm 1 210000 Line PhE leakage resistance in primary
ohms
Ph capacitive React 10...1000000 ohm 1 7000 Line PhE capacitive reactance in primary
ohms
Table continues on next page
Impedance:
±2.5% or ±0.25 Ω
Distance:
±2.5% or ±0.16 km/0.1 mile
XC0F_CALC:
±2.5% or ±50 Ω
IFLT_PER_ILD:
±5% or ±0.05
6.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR TCS TCM
A070788 V1 EN
6.1.3 Functionality
The trip circuit supervision function TCSSCBR is designed to supervise the control
circuit of the circuit breaker. The invalidity of a control circuit is detected by using
a dedicated output contact that contains the supervision functionality.The failure of
a circuit is reported to the corresponding function block in the IED configuration.
The function starts and operates when TCSSCBR detects a trip circuit failure. The
operating time characteristic for the function is DT. The function operates after a
predefined operating time and resets when the fault disappears.
A070785 V2 EN
TCS status
This module receives the trip circuit status from the hardware. A detected failure in
the trip circuit activates the timer.
Timer
Once activated, the timer runs until the set value of Operate delay time has elapsed.
The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached
the maximum time value, the ALARM output is activated. If a drop-off situation
occurs during the operate time up counting, the fixed 0.5 s reset timer is activated.
After that time, the operation timer is reset.
6.1.5 Application
TCSSCBR detects faults in the electrical control circuit of the circuit breaker. The
function can supervise both open and closed coil circuits. This supervision is
necessary to find out the vitality of the control circuits continuously.
Figure 199 shows an application of the trip circuit supervision function use. The
best solution is to connect an external Rext shunt resistor in parallel with the circuit
breaker internal contact. Although the circuit breaker internal contact is open, TCS
can see the trip circuit through Rext. The Rext resistor should have such a resistance
that the current through the resistance remains small, that is, it does not harm or
overload the circuit breaker's trip coil.
A051097 V6 EN
If TCS is required only in a closed position, the external shunt resistance can be
omitted. When the circuit breaker is in the open position, TCS sees the situation as
a faulty circuit. One way to avoid TCS operation in this situation would be to block
the supervision function whenever the circuit breaker is open.
A051906 V4 EN
A070968 V5 EN
Figure 201: Constant test current flow in parallel trip contacts and trip circuit
supervision
In case of parallel trip contacts, the recommended way to do the wiring is that the
TCS test current flows through all wires and joints.
A070970 V3 EN
Figure 202: Improved connection for parallel trip contacts where the test
current flows through all wires and joints
The circuit breaker coil current is normally cut by an internal contact of the circuit
breaker. In case of a circuit breaker failure, there is a risk that the protection IED
trip contact is destroyed since the contact is obliged to disconnect high level of
electromagnetic energy accumulated in the trip coil.
An auxiliary relay can be used between the protection IED trip contact and the
circuit breaker coil. This way the breaking capacity question is solved, but the TCS
circuit in the protection IED monitors the healthy auxiliary relay coil, not the
circuit breaker coil. The separate trip circuit supervision relay is applicable for this
to supervise the trip coil of the circuit breaker.
Ic Measuring current through the trip circuit, appr. 1.5 mA (0.99...1.72 mA)
If the external shunt resistance is used, it has to be calculated not to interfere with
the functionality of the supervision or the trip coil. Too high a resistance causes too
high a voltage drop, jeopardizing the requirement of at least 20 V over the internal
circuit, while a resistance too low can enable false operations of the trip coil.
Due to the requirement that the voltage over the TCS contact must be 20V or
higher, the correct operation is not guaranteed with auxiliary operating voltages
lower than 48V DC because of the voltage drop in Rint,Rext and the operating coil
or even voltage drop of the feeding auxiliary voltage system which can cause too
low voltage values over the TCS contact. In this case, erroneous alarming can occur.
GUID-0560DE53-903C-4D81-BAFD-175B9251872D V3 EN
Figure 203: Connection of a power output in a case when TCS is not used and
the internal resistor is disconnected
A070972 V4 EN
A connection of three protection IEDs with a double pole trip circuit is shown in
the following figure. Only the IED R3 has an internal TCS circuit. In order to test
the operation of the IED R2, but not to trip the circuit breaker, the upper trip
contact of the IED R2 is disconnected, as shown in the figure, while the lower
contact is still connected. When the IED R2 operates, the coil current starts to flow
through the internal resistor of the IED R3 and the resistor burns immediately. As
proven with the previous examples, both trip contacts must operate together.
Attention should also be paid for correct usage of the trip-circuit supervision while,
for example, testing the IED.
A070974 V5 EN
6.1.6 Signals
Table 365: TCSSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status
6.1.7 Settings
Table 367: TCSSCBR Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Operate delay time 20...300000 ms 1 3000 Operate delay time
Reset delay time 20...60000 ms 1 1000 Reset delay time
6.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF FUSEF 60
GUID-0A336F51-D8FA-4C64-A7FE-7A4270E621E7 V1 EN
6.2.3 Functionality
The fuse failure supervision function SEQRFUF is used to block the voltage-
measuring functions when failure occurs in the secondary circuits between the
voltage transformer (or combi sensor or voltage sensor) and IED to avoid
misoperations of the voltage protection functions.
A criterion based on the delta current and the delta voltage measurements can be
activated to detect three-phase fuse failures which usually are more associated with
the voltage transformer switching during station operations.
The operation of the fuse failure supervision function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
GUID-27E5A90A-6DCB-4545-A33A-F37C02F27A28 V1 EN
Voltage check
The phase voltage magnitude is checked when deciding whether the fuse failure is
a three, two or a single-phase fault.
The module makes a phase-specific comparison between each voltage input and
the Seal in voltage setting. If the input voltage is lower than the setting, the
corresponding phase is reported to the decision logic module.
The calculated delta quantities are compared to the respective set values of the
Current change rate and Voltage change rate settings.
The delta current and delta voltage algorithms detect a fuse failure if there is a
sufficient negative change in the voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in
the current amplitude in each phase separately. This is performed when the circuit
breaker is closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is connected to the
CB_CLOSED input.
There are two conditions for activating the current and voltage delta function.
• The magnitude of dU/dt exceeds the corresponding value of the Voltage
change rate setting and magnitude of dI/dt is below the value of the Current
change rate setting in any phase at the same time due to the closure of the
circuit breaker (CB_CLOSED = TRUE).
• The magnitude of dU/dt exceeds the value of the Voltage change rate setting
and the magnitude of dI/dt is below the Current change rate setting in any
phase at the same time and the magnitude of the phase current in the same
phase exceeds the Min Op current delta setting.
The first condition requires the delta criterion to be fulfilled in any phase at the
same time as the circuit breaker is closed. Opening the circuit breaker at one end
and energizing the line from the other end onto a fault could lead to an improper
operation of SEQRFUF with an open breaker. If this is considered to be an
important disadvantage, the CB_CLOSED input is to be connected to FALSE. In
this way only the second criterion can activate the delta function.
The second condition requires the delta criterion to be fulfilled in one phase
together with a high current for the same phase. The measured phase current is
used to reduce the risk of a false fuse failure detection. If the current on the
protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by the fuse failure) is
not followed by a current change and a false fuse failure can occur. To prevent this,
the minimum phase current criterion is checked.
The fuse failure detection is active until the voltages return above the Min Op
voltage delta setting. If a voltage in a phase is below the Min Op voltage delta
setting, a new fuse failure detection for that phase is not possible until the voltage
returns above the setting value.
Decision logic
The fuse failure detection outputs FUSEF_U and FUSEF_3PH are controlled
according to the detection criteria or external signals.
The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates both FUSEF_U and FUSEF_3PH
outputs.
6.2.5 Application
Some protection functions operate on the basis of the measured voltage value in the
IED point. These functions can fail if there is a fault in the measuring circuits
between the voltage transformer (or combi sensor or voltage sensor) and IED.
GUID-FA649B6A-B51E-47E2-8E37-EBA9CDEB2BF5 V1 EN
Figure 208: Fault in a circuit from the voltage transformer to the IED
A fuse failure occurs due to blown fuses, broken wires or intended substation
operations. The negative sequence component-based function can be used to detect
different types of single-phase or two-phase fuse failures. However, at least one of
the three circuits from the voltage transformers must be intact. The supporting delta-
based function can also detect a fuse failure due to three-phase interruptions.
6.2.6 Signals
Table 370: SEQRFUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current
6.2.7 Settings
Table 372: SEQRFUF Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Neg Seq current Lev 0.03...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.03 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element
Neg Seq voltage Lev 0.03...0.20 xUn 0.01 0.10 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element
Current change rate 0.01...0.50 xIn 0.01 0.15 Operate level of change in phase current
Voltage change rate 0.50...0.90 xUn 0.01 0.60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
Change rate enable 0=False 0=False Enabling operation of change based
1=True function
Min Op voltage delta 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.70 Minimum operate level of phase voltage
for delta calculation
Min Op current delta 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Minimum operate level of phase current
for delta calculation
Seal in voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage
Enable seal in 0=False 0=False Enabling seal in functionality
1=True
Current dead Lin Val 0.05...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Operate level for open phase current
detection
1) Includes the delay of the signal output contact, fn = 50 Hz, fault voltage with nominal frequency
injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
6.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Runtime counter for machines and MDSOPT OPTS OPTM
devices
GUID-C20AF735-FF25-411B-9EA6-11D595484613 V3 EN
6.3.3 Functionality
The generic runtime counter function MDSOPT calculates and presents the
accumulated operation time of a machine or device as the output. The unit of time
for accumulation is hour. The function generates a warning and an alarm when the
accumulated operation time exceeds the set limits. It utilizes a binary input to
indicate the active operation condition.
The accumulated operation time is one of the parameters for scheduling a service
on the equipment like motors. It indicates the use of the machine and hence the
The operation of the generic runtime counter for machines and devices can be
described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in
the next sections.
GUID-6BE6D1E3-F3FB-45D9-8D6F-A44752C1477C V1 EN
Limit Supervision
This module compares the motor run-time count to the set values of Warning value
and Alarm value to generate the WARNING and ALARM outputs respectively when
the counts exceed the levels.
The activation of the WARNING and ALARM outputs depends on the Operating time
mode setting. Both WARNING and ALARM occur immediately after the conditions
are met if Operating time mode is set to “Immediate”. If Operating time mode is set
to “Timed Warn”, WARNING is activated within the next 24 hours at the time of the
day set using the Operating time hour setting. If Operating time mode is set to
“Timed Warn Alm”, the WARNING and ALARM outputs are activated at the time of
day set using Operating time hour.
The Operating time hour setting is used to set the hour of day in
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The setting has to be adjusted
according to the local time and local daylight-saving time.
6.3.5 Application
The machine operating time since commissioning indicates the use of the machine.
For example, the mechanical wear and lubrication requirement for the shaft bearing
of the motors depend on the use hours.
If some motor is used for long duration runs, it might require frequent servicing,
while for a motor that is not used regularly the maintenance and service are
scheduled less frequently. The accumulated operating time of a motor together with
the appropriate settings for warning can be utilized to trigger the condition based
maintenance of the motor.
The operating time counter combined with the subsequent reset of the operating-
time count can be used to monitor the motor's run time for a single run.
Both the long term accumulated operating time and the short term single run
duration provide valuable information about the condition of the machine and
device. The information can be co-related to other process data to provide
diagnoses for the process where the machine or device is applied.
6.3.6 Signals
Table 375: MDSOPT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status
POS_ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0=False When active indicates the equipment is running
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Resets the accumulated operation time to initial
value
6.3.7 Settings
Table 377: MDSOPT Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Warning value 0...299999 h 1 8000 Warning value for operation time
supervision
Alarm value 0...299999 h 1 10000 Alarm value for operation time supervision
Initial value 0...299999 h 1 0 Initial value for operation time supervision
Operating time hour 0...23 h 1 0 Time of day when alarm and warning will
occur
Operating time mode 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Operating time mode for warning and
2=Timed Warn alarm
3=Timed Warn Alm
6.4.1 Identification
Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE
identification identification C37.2 device
number
Voltage presence PHSVPR PHSVPR PHSVPR
GUID-0205C517-A9C1-4265-990C-7222820EAC1A V1 EN
6.4.3 Functionality
The function block PHSVPR supervises the voltage presence status. The function
can be used for indicating voltage presence status of a load break switch or a circuit
breaker.
The operation of the function can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
GUID-DFB5F406-3F80-43B6-BD7E-93E94EFC680B V1 EN
Voltage detector
This module supervises voltage presence status value of a load switch or a circuit
breaker. The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting the phase-to-earth or
phase-to-phase voltages for voltage detection, and the Phase supervision setting
defines which phase or phases are monitored. The measured voltages are compared
with threshold settings.
If the measured voltage is larger than the limit value set by V live value setting and
high voltage lasts longer than the time set by V live time setting, the voltage
presence is interpreted as live. The corresponding phase specific output indicating
live situation is activated. Phase status is also reported to the phase selection logic
module.
Once the voltage is lower than setting V live value, corresponding phase specific
output is deactivated and voltage live timer is reset.
If the measured voltage is lower than setting V dead value and low voltage
situation lasts longer than the time set by V dead time setting, the voltage presence
is interpreted as dead. The corresponding phase specific output indicating dead
situation is activated. Phase status is also reported to the phase selection logic module.
Once the voltage is larger than setting V dead value, the corresponding phase
specific output is deactivated and voltage dead timer is reset.
The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations
if the input signal varies slightly above or below the threshold setting. After leaving
the hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers.
General output U_DEAD is activated when setting Num of phases matches the
number of phases where voltage is below the set low level setting. U_DEAD output
is deactivated immediately after voltage dead condition is no longer met.
6.4.5 Application
Voltage presence indication PHSVPR can be used to detect which one of the MV
feeders is energized for feeding the MV/LV transformer. This can reduce the
needed time to restore the power after a fault occurs in the distribution network and
power needs to be manually re-routed.
GUID-9CD263BF-4825-4D73-89F3-86750F87564F V1 EN
Never use PHSVPR as the only indication to check if the line is dead.
If the IED is used for the fault indication purposes only, then there might be need
to confirm the upstream breaker tripping. PHSVPR can be used for this purpose
together with protection and generic counter functions.
6.4.6 Signals
Table 381: PHSVPR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage A or phase-to-phase
voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage B or phase-to-phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage C or phase-to-phase
voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
6.4.7 Settings
Table 383: PHSVPR Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Voltage selection 1=phase-to-earth 2=phase-to-phase Parameter to select phase or phase-to-
2=phase-to-phase phase voltages
Phase supervision 1=A + AB 4=C + CA Monitored voltage phase
2=B + BC
3=A&B + AB&BC
4=C + CA
5=A&C + AB&CA
6=B&C + BC&CA
7=A&B&C +
AB&BC&CA
Table continues on next page
7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR CBCM CBCM
GUID-E5EB1D7B-AF92-4492-A81F-090BACF0B8D7 V1 EN
7.1.3 Functionality
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor
different parameters of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when
the number of operations has reached a predefined value. The energy is calculated
from the measured input currents as a sum of Iyt values. Alarms are generated
when the calculated values exceed the threshold settings.
The operation of the functions can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
GUID-D120F3D5-4DA2-400E-BCA7-E3FDE180B1BC V1 EN
The Circuit breaker status sub-function monitors the position of the circuit breaker,
that is, whether the breaker is in open, closed or invalid position. The operation of
the breaker status monitoring can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
A071104 V3 EN
Figure 216: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
The CLOSEPOS output is activated when the POSOPEN input is FALSE and the
POSCLOSE input is TRUE.
The INVALIDPOS output is activated when both the auxiliary contacts have the
same value, that is, both are in the same logical level, or if the auxiliary input
contact POSCLOSE is FALSE and the POSOPEN input is TRUE and any of the
phase currents exceed the setting Acc stop current.
The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
A071105 V2 EN
Figure 217: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm
for circuit breaker operation monitoring
Inactivity timer
The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained
inactive, that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done
by monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The inactive days INA_DAYS is available in the monitored data view. It is also
possible to set the initial inactive days with the Ini inactive days parameter.
The Breaker contact travel time module calculates the breaker contact travel time
for the closing and opening operation. The operation of the breaker contact travel
time measurement can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.
A071106 V4 EN
Figure 218: Functional module diagram for breaker contact travel time
When the setting Travel time Clc mode is “From Pos to Pos”, the contact travel
time of the breaker is calculated from the time between auxiliary contacts' state
change. The opening travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSCLOSE auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact.
The travel time is also measured between the opening of the POSOPEN auxiliary
contact and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact.
A071107 V1 EN
Figure 219: Travel time calculation when Travel time Clc mode is “From Pos to
Pos”
There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact
is completely open. To incorporate the time t1 + t2, a correction factor needs to be
added with topen to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with the
Opening time Cor (= t1 + t2) setting. The closing time is calculated by adding the
value set with the Closing time Cor (t3 + t4) setting to the measured closing time.
When the setting Travel time Clc mode is “From Cmd to Pos”, the contact travel
time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the circuit breaker opening
or closing command and the auxiliary contacts’ state change. The opening travel
time is measured between the rising edge of the OPEN_CB_EXE command and
the POSOPEN auxiliary contact. The closing travel time is measured between the
rising edge of the CLOSE_CB_EXEC command and the POSCLOSE auxiliary
contact.
GUID-A8C2EB5B-F105-4BF7-B1EC-77D4B8238531 V1 EN
Figure 220: Travel time calculation when Travel time Clc mode is “From Cmd
to Pos”
There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
OPEN_CB_EXE command. Similarly, there is a time gap t2 between the time
when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely
open. Therefore, to incorporate the times t1 and t2, a correction factor needs to be
added with topen to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with the
Opening time Cor (= t2 - t1) setting. The closing time is calculated by adding the
value set with the Closing time Cor (t4 - t3) setting to the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time T_TRV_OP and the closing travel time
T_TRV_CL are available in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools
via communications.
The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
A071108 V2 EN
Figure 221: Functional module diagram for counting circuit breaker operations
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of
the binary auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NO_OPR is available in the monitored data view on the
LHMI or through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation
counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the Counter initial Val
parameter and by setting the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from
WHMI or LHMI.
The binary outputs OPR_LO and OPR_ALM are deactivated when the BLOCK input
is activated.
The operation of the module can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
A071109 V2 EN
The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE input opening events. It ends when
the RMS current becomes lower than the Acc stop current setting value.
A071110 V1 EN
The Difference Cor time setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to
accumulate the energy from the time the main contact opens. If the setting is
positive, the calculation of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and
when the delay is equal to the value set with the Difference Cor time setting. When
the setting is negative, the calculation starts in advance by the correction time
before the auxiliary contact opens.
The accumulated energy outputs IPOW_A (_B, _C) are available in the
monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The
values can be reset by setting the parameter CB accum. currents power setting to
true in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.
The IPOW_ALM and IPOW_LO outputs can be blocked by activating the binary
input BLOCK.
Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to
wearing. The wearing in the breaker depends on the tripping current, and the
remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve
provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is decremented at least with one
when the circuit breaker is opened.
The operation of the remaining life of the circuit breaker subfunction can be
described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in
the next sections.
A071111 V2 EN
Figure 224: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker
The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as
a monitored data value CB_LIFE_A (_B,_C). The values can be cleared by
setting the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.
The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
A071112 V3 EN
The spring charging time T_SPR_CHR is available in the monitored data view on
the LHMI or through tools via communications.
The gas pressure supervision subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc
chamber.
The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
A071113 V2 EN
Figure 226: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm
The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals PRES_LO_IN and
PRES_ALM_IN.
Timer 1
When the PRES_ALM_IN binary input is activated, the PRES_ALM alarm is
activated after a time delay set with the Pressure alarm time setting. The
PRES_ALM alarm can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.
Timer 2
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRES_LO_IN binary input
becomes high, activating the lockout alarm PRES_LO after a time delay set with
the Pres lockout time setting. The PRES_LO alarm can be blocked by activating
the BLOCK input.
7.1.5 Application
SSCBR includes different metering and monitoring subfunctions.
reaches its closed position. The travel times are calculated based on the state
changes of the auxiliary contacts and the adding correction factor to consider the
time difference of the main contact's and the auxiliary contact's position change.
Operation counter
Routine maintenance of the breaker, such as lubricating breaker mechanism, is
generally based on a number of operations. A suitable threshold setting to raise an
alarm when the number of operation cycle exceeds the set limit helps preventive
maintenance. This can also be used to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for
dielectric testing in case of an oil circuit breaker.
The change of state can be detected from the binary input of the auxiliary contact.
There is a possibility to set an initial value for the counter which can be used to
initialize this functionality after a period of operation or in case of refurbished
primary equipment.
Accumulation of Iyt
Accumulation of Iyt calculates the accumulated energy ΣIyt, where the factor y is
known as the current exponent. The factor y depends on the type of the circuit
breaker. For oil circuit breakers, the factor y is normally 2. In case of a high-
voltage system, the factor y can be 1.4...1.5.
A071114 V3 EN
Figure 227: Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV, 630 A, 16 kA vacuum interrupter
B
log
Directional Coef = A = −2.2609
If
log
Ir
A070794 V2 EN (Equation 45)
Figure 227 shows that there are 30,000 possible operations at the rated operating
current of 630 A and 20 operations at the rated fault current 16 kA. Therefore, if
the tripping current is 10 kA, one operation at 10 kA is equivalent to
30,000/60=500 operations at the rated current. It is also assumed that prior to this
tripping, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is 15,000 operations. Therefore,
after one operation of 10 kA, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is
15,000-500=14,500 at the rated operating current.
Spring-charged indication
For normal operation of the circuit breaker, the circuit breaker spring should be
charged within a specified time. Therefore, detecting long spring-charging time
indicates that it is time for the circuit breaker maintenance. The last value of the
spring-charging time can be used as a service value.
7.1.6 Signals
Table 386: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for closeposition of apparatus from I/O
Table continues on next page
7.1.7 Settings
Table 388: SSCBR Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Acc stop current 5.00...500.00 A 0.01 10.00 RMS current setting below which engy
acm stops
Open alarm time 0...200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for open travel time in
ms
Close alarm time 0...200 ms 1 40 Alarm level Setting for close travel time
in ms
Table continues on next page
8.1.1 Functions
The three-phase current measurement function CMMXU is used for monitoring
and metering the phase currents of the power system.
The sequence current measurement CSMSQI is used for monitoring and metering
the phase sequence currents.
The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI is used for monitoring and metering
the phase sequence voltages.
The three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU is used for monitoring
and metering active power (P), reactive power (Q), apparent power (S) and power
factor (PF) and for calculating the accumulated energy separately as forward
active, reversed active, forward reactive and reversed reactive. PEMMXU
calculates these quantities using the fundamental frequency phasors, that is, the
DFT values of the measured phase current and phase voltage signals.
The information of the measured quantity is available for the operator both locally
in LHMI and remotely to a network control center with communication.
If the Demand interval setting is set to "15 minutes", for example, the demand
values are updated every quarter of an hour. The demand time interval is
synchronized to the real-time clock of the IED. When the demand time interval or
calculation mode is changed, it initializes the demand value calculation. For the
very first demand value calculation interval, the values are stated as invalid until
the first refresh is available.
The "Linear" calculation mode uses the periodic sliding average calculation of the
measured signal over the demand time interval. A new demand value is obtained
once in a minute, indicating the analog signal demand over the demand time
interval proceeding the update time. The actual rolling demand values are stored in
the memory until the value is updated at the end of the next time interval.
The "Logarithmic" calculation mode uses the periodic calculation using a log10
function over the demand time interval to replicate thermal demand ammeters. The
logarithmic demand calculates a snapshot of the analog signal every 1/15 x demand
time interval.
Each measurement function has its own recorded data values. In IED, these are
found in Monitoring/Recorded data/Measurements. In the technical manual
these are listed in the monitored data section of each measurement function. These
values are periodically updated with the maximum and minimum demand values.
The time stamps are provided for both values.
Value reporting
The measurement functions are capable of reporting new values for network
control center (SCADA system) based on the following functions:
• Zero-point clamping
• Deadband supervision
• Limit value supervision
Zero-point clamping
A measured value under the zero-point clamping limit is forced to zero. This
allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored. The active clamping function
forces both the actual measurement value and the angle value of the measured
signal to zero. In the three-phase or sequence measuring functions, each phase or
sequence component has a separate zero-point clamping function. The zero-value
detection operates so that once the measured value exceeds or falls below the value
of the zero-clamping limit, new values are reported.
• 0: "normal"
• 1: "high"
• 2: "low"
• 3: "high-high"
• 4: "low-low"
The range information changes and the new values are reported.
GUID-AAAA7367-377C-4743-A2D0-8DD4941C585D V1 EN
The range information can also be decoded into boolean output signals on some of
the measuring functions and the number of phases required to exceed or undershoot
the limit before activating the outputs and can be set with the Num of phases setting
in the three-phase measurement functions CMMXU and VMMXU. The limit
supervision boolean alarm and warning outputs can be blocked.
Deadband supervision
The deadband supervision function reports the measured value according to
integrated changes over a time period.
GUID-63CA9A0F-24D8-4BA8-A667-88632DF53284 V1 EN
The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the X
deadband setting. The value represents the percentage of the difference between
the maximum and minimum limit in the units of 0.001 percent x seconds.
The reporting delay of the integral algorithms in seconds is calculated with the
formula:
(max − min) × deadband / 1000
t (s) =
∆Y × 100%
GUID-5381484E-E205-4548-A846-D3519578384B V1 EN (Equation 46)
Once the complex apparent power is calculated, P, Q, S and PF are calculated with
the equations:
P = Re( S )
GUID-92B45FA5-0B6B-47DC-9ADB-69E7EB30D53A V3 EN (Equation 48)
Q = Im( S )
GUID-CA5C1D5D-3AD9-468C-86A1-835525F8BE27 V2 EN (Equation 49)
S = S = P2 + Q2
GUID-B3999831-E376-4DAF-BF36-BA6F761230A9 V2 EN (Equation 50)
P
Cosϕ =
S
GUID-D729F661-94F9-48B1-8FA0-06E84A6F014C V2 EN (Equation 51)
Depending on the unit multiplier selected with Power unit Mult, the calculated
power values are presented in units of kVA/kW/kVAr or in units of MVA/MW/
MVAr.
GUID-9947B4F2-CD26-4F85-BF57-EAF1593AAE1B V1 EN
The active power P direction can be selected between forward and reverse with
Active power Dir and correspondingly the reactive power Q direction can be
selected with Reactive power Dir. This affects also the accumulated energy directions.
When the energy counter reaches its defined maximum value, the counter value is
reset and restarted from zero. Changing the value of the Energy unit Mult setting
resets the accumulated energy values to the initial values, that is, EA_FWD_ACM to
Forward Wh Initial, EA_RV_ACM to Reverse Wh Initial, ER_FWD_ACM to
Forward WArh Initial and ER_RV_ACM to Reverse WArh Initial. It is also possible
to reset the accumulated energy to initial values through a parameter or with the
RSTACM input.
Sequence components
The phase-sequence components are calculated using the phase currents and phase
voltages. More information on calculating the phase-sequence components can be
found in General function block features in this manual.
When the zero signal is measured, the noise in the input signal can still produce
small measurement values. The zero point clamping function can be used to ignore
the noise in the input signal and, hence, prevent the noise to be shown in the user
display. The zero clamping is done for the measured analog signals and angle values.
The demand values are used to neglect sudden changes in the measured analog
signals when monitoring long time values for the input signal. The demand values
are linear average values of the measured signal over a settable demand interval.
The demand values are calculated for the measured analog three-phase current
signals.
The limit supervision indicates, if the measured signal exceeds or goes below the
set limits. Depending on the measured signal type, up to two high limits and up to
two low limits can be set for the limit supervision.
The deadband supervision reports a new measurement value if the input signal has
gone out of the deadband state. The deadband supervision can be used in value
reporting between the measurement point and operation control. When the
deadband supervision is properly configured, it helps in keeping the
communication load in minimum and yet measurement values are reported
frequently enough.
8.1.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU 3I 3I
A070777 V2 EN
8.1.4.3 Signals
Table 396: CMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs
8.1.4.4 Settings
Table 398: CMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
Num of phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit
2=2 out of 3 supervision
3=3 out of 3
A high high limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1.40 High alarm current limit
A high limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1.20 High warning current limit
A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low warning current limit
A low low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low alarm current limit
A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation. (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)
±0.5% or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In)
8.1.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU 3U 3U
GUID-5B741292-7FA6-4DEA-8D16-B530FD16A0FE V1 EN
8.1.5.3 Signals
Table 402: VMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase
voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage B or phase to phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage C or phase to phase
voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs
8.1.5.4 Settings
Table 404: VMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
Num of phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit
2=2 out of 3 supervision
3=3 out of 3
V high high limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1.40 High alarm voltage limit
V high limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1.20 High warning voltage limit
Table continues on next page
±0.5% or ±0.002 × Un
8.1.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Residual current measurement RESCMMXU Io Io
A070778 V2 EN
8.1.6.3 Signals
Table 407: RESCMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs
8.1.6.4 Settings
Table 409: RESCMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
A Hi high limit res 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.20 High alarm current limit
A high limit res 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.05 High warning current limit
A deadband res 100...100000 2500 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation. (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)
±0.5% or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In)
8.1.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Frequency measurement FMMXU1 F F
GUID-5CCF8F8C-E1F4-421B-8BE9-C0620F7446A7 V1 EN
8.1.7.3 Signals
Table 413: FMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
F SIGNAL — Measured system frequency
8.1.7.4 Settings
Table 414: FMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
F high high limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 60.00 High alarm frequency limit
F high limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 55.00 High warning frequency limit
F low limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 45.00 Low warning frequency limit
F low low limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 40.00 Low alarm frequency limit
F deadband 100...100000 1000 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)
8.1.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0
A070784 V2 EN
8.1.8.3 Signals
8.1.8.4 Settings
Table 418: CSMSQI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Ps Seq A Hi high Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 1.40 High alarm current limit for positive
sequence current
Ps Seq A high limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1.20 High warning current limit for positive
sequence current
Ps Seq A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low warning current limit for positive
sequence current
Ps Seq A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low alarm current limit for positive
sequence current
Ps Seq A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configuration value for
positive sequence current for integral
calculation. (percentage of difference
between min and max as 0,001 % s)
Table continues on next page
±1.0% or ±0.002 × In
at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In
8.1.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI U1, U2, U0 U1, U2, U0
GUID-63393283-E2C1-406A-9E70-847662D83CFC V2 EN
8.1.9.3 Signals
8.1.9.4 Settings
Table 422: VSMSQI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Ps Seq V Hi high Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 1.40 High alarm voltage limit for positive
sequence voltage
Ps Seq V high limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1.20 High warning voltage limit for positive
sequence voltage
Ps Seq V low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low warning voltage limit for positive
sequence voltage
Ps Seq V low low Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit for positive
sequence voltage
Ps Seq V deadband 100...100000 10000 Deadband configuration value for
positive sequence voltage for integral
calculation. (percentage of difference
between min and max as 0,001 % s)
Table continues on next page
±1.0% or ±0.002 × Un
8.1.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase power and energy PEMMXU P, E P, E
measurement
GUID-E38A24DA-85CE-4246-9C3F-DFC6FDAEA302 V1 EN
8.1.10.3 Signals
Table 425: PEMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
U_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A voltage
U_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B voltage
U_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C voltage
RSTACM BOOLEAN 0=False Reset of accumulated energy reading
8.1.10.4 Settings
Table 426: PEMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Power unit Mult 3=Kilo 3=Kilo Unit multiplier for presentation of the
6=Mega power related values
Energy unit Mult 3=Kilo 3=Kilo Unit multiplier for presentation of the
6=Mega energy related values
Table continues on next page
8.2.1 Functionality
The relay is provided with a disturbance recorder with up to 12 analog and 64
binary signal channels. The analog channels can be set to record either the
waveform or the trend of the currents and voltages measured.
The analog channels can be set to trigger the recording function when the measured
value falls below, or exceeds, the set values. The binary signal channels can be set
to start a recording either on the rising or the falling edge of the binary signal or on
both.
By default, the binary channels are set to record external or internal relay signals,
for example, the start or trip signals of the relay stages, or external blocking or
control signals. Binary relay signals, such as protection start and trip signals, or an
external relay control signal via a binary input, can be set to trigger the recording.
Recorded information is stored in a non-volatile memory and can be uploaded for
subsequent fault analysis.
The user can map any analog signal type of the IED to each analog channel of the
disturbance recorder by setting the Channel selection parameter of the
corresponding analog channel. In addition, the user can enable or disable each
analog channel of the disturbance recorder by setting the Operation parameter of
the corresponding analog channel to "on" or "off".
All analog channels of the disturbance recorder that are enabled and have a valid
signal type mapped are included in the recording.
Regardless of the triggering type, each recording generates events through state
changes of the Recording started, Recording made and Recording stored status
parameters. The Recording stored parameter indicates that the recording has been
stored to the non-volatile memory. In addition, every analog channel and binary
channel of the disturbance recorder has its own Channel triggered parameter.
Manual trigger has the Manual triggering parameter and periodic trigger has the
Periodic triggering parameter.
Manual triggering
The recorder can be triggered manually via the LHMI or via communication by
setting the Trig recording parameter to TRUE.
Periodic triggering
Periodic triggering means that the recorder automatically makes a recording at
certain time intervals. The user can adjust the interval with the Periodic trig time
parameter. If the value of the parameter is changed, the new setting takes effect
when the next periodic triggering occurs. Setting the parameter to zero disables the
triggering alternative and the setting becomes valid immediately. If a new non-zero
setting needs to be valid immediately, the user should first set the Periodic trig
time parameter to zero and then to the new value. The user can monitor the time
remaining to the next triggering with the Time to trigger monitored data
which counts downwards.
The user can define the length of a recording with the Record length parameter.
The length is given as the number of fundamental cycles.
According to the memory available and the number of analog channels used, the
disturbance recorder automatically calculates the remaining amount of recordings
that fit into the available recording memory. The user can see this information with
the Rem. amount of rec monitored data. The fixed memory size allocated
for the recorder can fit in two recordings that are ten seconds long. The recordings
contain data from all analog and binary channels of the disturbance recorder, at the
sample rate of 32 samples per fundamental cycle.
The user can view the number of recordings currently in memory with the Number
of recordings monitored data. The currently used memory space can be
viewed with the Rec. memory used monitored data. It is shown as a
percentage value.
The IED stores COMTRADE files to the C:\COMTRADE\ folder. The files can be
uploaded with the PCM tool or any appropriate computer software that can access
the C:\COMTRADE\ folder.
One complete disturbance recording consists of two COMTRADE file types: the
configuration file and the data file. The file name is the same for both file types.
The configuration file has .CFG and the data file .DAT as the file extension.
A070835 V1 EN
The naming convention of 8+3 characters is used in COMTRADE file naming. The
file name is composed of the last two octets of the IED's IP number and a running
There are several ways to delete disturbance recordings. The recordings can be
deleted individually or all at once.
Individual disturbance recordings can be deleted with the PCM tool or any
appropriate computer software, which can access the IED's C:\COMTRADE folder.
The disturbance recording is not removed from the IED memory until both of the
corresponding COMTRADE files, .CFG and .DAT, are deleted. The user may have
to delete both of the files types separately, depending on the software used.
Deleting all disturbance recordings at once is done either with the PCM tool or any
appropriate computer software, or from the LHMI via the Clear/Disturbance
records menu. Deleting all disturbance recordings at once also clears the pre-
trigger recording in progress.
The disturbance recorder can capture data in two modes: waveform and trend
mode. The user can set the storage mode individually for each trigger source with
the Storage mode parameter of the corresponding analog channel or binary
channel, the Stor. mode manual parameter for manual trigger and the Stor. mode
periodic parameter for periodic trigger.
In the waveform mode, the samples are captured according to the Storage rate and
Pre-trg length parameters.
In the trend mode, one value is recorded for each enabled analog channel, once per
fundamental cycle. The recorded values are RMS values, which are scaled to peak
level. The binary channels of the disturbance recorder are also recorded once per
fundamental cycle in the trend mode.
The waveforms of the disturbance recorder analog channels and the states of the
disturbance recorder binary channels are constantly recorded into the history
memory of the recorder. The user can adjust the percentage of the data duration
preceding the triggering, that is, the so-called pre-trigger time, with the Pre-trg
length parameter. The duration of the data following the triggering, that is, the so-
called post-trigger time, is the difference between the recording length and the pre-
trigger time. Changing the pre-trigger time resets the history data and the current
recording under collection.
Disturbance recorder has two operation modes: saturation and overwrite mode. The
user can change the operation mode of the disturbance recorder with the Operation
mode parameter.
Saturation mode
In saturation mode, the captured recordings cannot be overwritten with new
recordings. Capturing the data is stopped when the recording memory is full, that
is, when the maximum number of recordings is reached. In this case, the event is
sent via the state change (TRUE) of the Memory full parameter. When there is
memory available again, another event is generated via the state change (FALSE)
of the Memory full parameter.
Overwrite mode
When the operation mode is "Overwrite" and the recording memory is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten with the pre-trigger data collected for the next
recording. Each time a recording is overwritten, the event is generated via the state
change of the Overwrite of rec. parameter. The overwrite mode is recommended, if
it is more important to have the latest recordings in the memory. The saturation
mode is preferred, when the oldest recordings are more important.
New triggerings are blocked in both the saturation and the overwrite mode until the
previous recording is completed. On the other hand, a new triggering can be
accepted before all pre-trigger samples are collected for the new recording. In such
a case, the recording is as much shorter as there were pre-trigger samples lacking.
Exclusion mode is on, when the value set with the Exclusion time parameter is
higher than zero. During the exclusion mode, new triggerings are ignored if the
triggering reason is the same as in the previous recording. The Exclusion time
parameter controls how long the exclusion of triggerings of same type is active
after a triggering. The exclusion mode only applies to the analog and binary
channel triggerings, not to periodic and manual triggerings.
When the value set with the Exclusion time parameter is zero, the exclusion mode
is disabled and there are no restrictions on the triggering types of the successive
recordings.
The exclusion time setting is global for all inputs, but there is an individual counter
for each analog and binary channel of the disturbance recorder, counting the
remaining exclusion time. The user can monitor the remaining exclusion time with
the Exclusion time rem parameter of the corresponding analog or binary channel.
The Exclusion time rem parameter counts downwards.
8.2.2 Configuration
The user can configure the disturbance recorder with the PCM600 tool or any tool
supporting the IEC 61850 standard.
The user can enable or disable the disturbance recorder with the Operation
parameter under the Configuration/Disturbance recorder/General menu.
One analog signal type of the IED can be mapped to each of the analog channels of
the disturbance recorder. The mapping is done with the Channel selection
parameter of the corresponding analog channel. The name of the analog channel is
user-configurable. The user can modify it by writing the new name to the Channel
id text parameter of the corresponding analog channel.
Any external or internal digital signal of the IED which can be dynamically
mapped can be connected to the binary channels of the disturbance recorder. These
signals can be, for example, the start and trip signals from protection function
blocks or the external binary inputs of the IED. The connection is made with
dynamic mapping to the binary channel of the disturbance recorder using, for
example, SMT of PCM600. It is also possible to connect several digital signals to
one binary channel of the disturbance recorder. In that case, the signals can be
combined with logical functions, for example AND and OR. The user can
configure the name of the binary channel and modify it by writing the new name to
the Channel id text parameter of the corresponding binary channel.
Note that the Channel id text parameter is used in COMTRADE configuration files
as a channel identifier.
The recording always contains all binary channels of the disturbance recorder. If
one of the binary channels is disabled, the recorded state of the channel is
continuously FALSE and the state changes of the corresponding channel are not
recorded. The corresponding channel name for disabled binary channels in the
COMTRADE configuration file is Unused BI.
To enable or disable a binary channel of the disturbance recorder, the user can set
the Operation parameter of the corresponding binary channel to the values "on" or
"off".
The states of manual triggering and periodic triggering are not included in the
recording, but they create a state change to the Periodic triggering and Manual
triggering status parameters, which in turn create events.
The Recording started parameter can be used to control the indication LEDs of the
IED. The output of the Recording started parameter is TRUE due to the triggering
of the disturbance recorder, until all the data for the corresponding recording is
recorded.
The IP number of the IED and the content of the Bay name
parameter are both included in the COMTRADE configuration file
for identification purposes.
8.2.3 Application
The disturbance recorder is used for post-fault analysis and for verifying the correct
operation of protection IEDs and circuit breakers. It can record both analog and
binary signal information. The analog inputs are recorded as instantaneous values
and converted to primary peak value units when the IED converts the recordings to
the COMTRADE format.
The binary channels are sampled once per task execution of the disturbance
recorder. The task execution interval for the disturbance recorder is the same as for
the protection functions. During the COMTRADE conversion, the digital status
values are repeated so that the sampling frequencies of the analog and binary
channels correspond to each other. This is required by the COMTRADE standard.
8.2.4 Settings
Table 430: Non-group general settings for disturbance recorder
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1 1=on Disturbance
5=off recorder on/off
Record length 10...500 fundamental 1 50 Size of the
cycles recording in
fundamental
cycles
Pre-trg length 0...100 % 1 50 Length of the
recording
preceding the
triggering
Operation 1=Saturation 1 1 Operation
mode 2=Overwrite mode of the
recorder
Table continues on next page
1) Recordable values are available only in trend mode. In waveform mode, samples for this signal type
are constant zeroes. However, these signal types can be used to trigger the recorder on limit
violations of the corresponding analog channel.
9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker control CBXCBR I<->O CB I<->O CB
A071284 V3 EN
9.1.3 Functionality
The CBXCBR is intended for circuit breaker control and status information
purposes. This function executes commands and evaluate block conditions and
different time supervision conditions. The function performs an execution
command only if all conditions indicate that a switch operation is allowed. If
erroneous conditions occur, the functions indicate an appropriate cause value. The
function is designed according to the IEC 61850-7-4 standard with logical nodes
CILO, CSWI and XSWI / XCBR.
The circuit breaker control function has an operation counter for closing and
opening cycles. The counter value can be read and written remotely from the place
of operation or via LHMI.
Blocking
CBXCBR has a blocking functionality to prevent human errors that can cause
injuries to the operator and damages to the system components.
The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they affect the commands of
other clients: the operator place and protection and autoreclosing functions, for
example. There are two blocking principles.
• Enabling the opening command: the function is used to block the operation of
the opening command. Note that this block signal also affects the OPEN input
of immediate command.
• Enabling the closing command: the function is used to block the operation of
the closing command. Note that this block signal also affects the CLOSE input
of immediate command.
The Pulse length setting does not affect the length of the trip pulse.
Control methods
The command execution mode can be set with the Control model setting. The
alternatives for command execution are direct control and secured object control,
which can be used to secure controlling.
A070878 V2 EN
9.1.5 Application
In the field of distribution and sub-transmission automation, reliable control and
status indication of primary switching components both locally and remotely is in a
significant role. They are needed especially in modern remotely controlled
substations.
Control and status indication facilities are implemented in the same package with
CBXCBR. When primary components are controlled in the energizing phase, for
example, the correct execution sequence of the control commands must be ensured.
This can be achieved, for example, with interlocking based on the status indication
of the related primary components. The interlocking on the substation level can be
applied using the IEC61850 GOOSE messages between feeders.
A070879 V2 EN
9.1.6 Signals
Table 437: CBXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1=True Enables opening
ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1=True Enables closing
BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks opening
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks closing
ITL_BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE
interlocking when TRUE
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Input signal used to open the breaker1)
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Input signal used to close the breaker1)
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O1)
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for closed position of apparatus from I/O1)
9.1.7 Settings
Table 439: CBXCBR Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation mode on/off
5=off
Select timeout 10000...300000 ms 10000 60000 Select timeout in ms
Pulse length 10...60000 ms 1 100 Open and close pulse length
Operation counter 0...10000 0 Breaker operation cycles
Control model 0=status-only 4=sbo-with- Select control model
1=direct-with- enhanced-security
normal-security
4=sbo-with-
enhanced-security
Adaptive pulse 0=False 1=True Stop in right position
1=True
Event delay 0...10000 ms 1 100 Event delay of the intermediate position
Operation timeout 10...60000 ms 500 Timeout for negative termination
9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI I<->O DC I<->O DC
Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI I<->O ES I<->O ES
A071280 V2 EN
A071282 V2 EN
9.2.3 Functionality
The functions DCSXSWI and ESSXSWI indicate remotely and locally the open,
close and undefined states of the disconnector and earthing switch. The
functionality of both is identical, but each one is allocated for a specific purpose
visible in the function names. For example, the status indication of disconnectors or
circuit breaker truck can be monitored with the DCSXSWI function.
The functions are designed according to the IEC 61850-7-4 standard with the
logical node XSWI.
9.2.5 Application
In the field of distribution and sub-transmission automation, the reliable control
and status indication of primary switching components both locally and remotely is
in a significant role. These features are needed especially in modern remote
controlled substations. The application area of DCSXSWI and ESSXSWI functions
covers remote and local status indication of, for example, disconnectors, air-break
switches and earthing switches, which represent the lowest level of power
switching devices without short-circuit breaking capability.
9.2.6 Signals
Table 443: DCSXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus open position1)
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus closed position1)
9.2.7 Settings
Table 447: DCSXSWI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Event delay 0...60000 ms 1 30000 Event delay of the intermediate position
9.3.1 Identification
Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN SYNC 25
GUID-9270E059-ED17-4355-90F0-3345E1743464 V2 EN
9.3.3 Functionality
The synchrocheck function SECRSYN checks the condition across the circuit
breaker from separate power system parts and gives the permission to close the
circuit breaker. SECRSYN includes the functionality of synchrocheck and
energizing check.
The synchrocheck operation mode checks that the voltages on both sides of the
circuit breaker are perfectly synchronized. It is used to perform a controlled
reconnection of two systems which are divided after islanding and it is also used to
perform a controlled reconnection of the system after reclosing.
The energizing check function checks that at least one side is dead to ensure that
closing can be done safely.
SECRSYN has two parallel functionalities, the synchro check and energizing
check functionality. The operation of the synchronism and energizing check
functionality can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.
Energizing
check
Synchro
check
GUID-FE07029C-C6C1-4BA7-9F8E-CACE86D0A9BD V2 EN
The Synchro check function can operate either with the U_AB or U_A voltages.
The selection of used voltages is defined with the VT connection setting of the line
voltage general parameters.
Energizing check
The Energizing check function checks the energizing direction. Energizing is
defined as a situation where a dead network part is connected to an energized
section of the network. The conditions of the network sections to be controlled by
the circuit breaker, that is, which side has to be live and which side dead, are
determined by the setting. A situation where both sides are dead is possible as well.
The actual value for defining the dead line or bus is given with the Dead bus value
and Dead line value settings. Similarly, the actual values of live line or bus are
defined with the Live bus value and Live line value settings.
Table 451: Live dead mode of operation under which switching can be carried out
Live dead mode Description
Both Dead Both line and bus de-energized
Live L, Dead B Bus de-energized and line energized
Dead L, Live B Line de-energized and bus energized
Dead Bus, L Any Both line and bus de-energized or bus de-
energized and line energized
Dead L, Bus Any Both line and bus de-energized or line de-
energized and bus energized
One Live, Dead Bus de-energized and line energized or line de-
energized and bus energized
Not Both Live Both line and bus de-energized or bus de-
energized and line energized or line de-
energized and bus energized
When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to be
constant for a time set with the Energizing time setting before the circuit breaker
closing is permitted. The purpose of this time delay is to ensure that the dead side
remains de-energized and also that the situation is not caused by a temporary
interference. If the conditions do not persist for a specified operation time, the
timer is reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions allow. The circuit
breaker closing is not permitted if the measured voltage on the live side is greater
than the set value of Max energizing V.
Synchro check
The Synchro check function measures the difference between the line voltage and
bus voltage. The function permits the closing of the circuit breaker when certain
conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.
• The measured line and bus voltages are higher than the set values of Live bus
value and Live line value (ENERG_STATE equals to "Both Live").
• The measured bus and line frequency are both within the range of 95 to 105
percent of the value of fn.
• The measured voltages for the line and bus are less than the set value of Max
energizing V.
In case Syncro check mode is set to "Syncronous", the additional conditions must
be fulfilled.
• In the synchronous mode, the closing is attempted so that the phase difference
at closing is close to zero.
• The synchronous mode is only possible when the frequency slip is below 0.1
percent of the value of fn.
• The voltage difference must not exceed the 1 percent of the value of Un.
In case Syncro check mode is set to “Asyncronous”, the additional conditions must
be fulfilled.
• The measured difference of the voltages is less than the set value of Difference
voltage.
• The measured difference of the phase angles is less than the set value of
Difference angle.
• The measured difference in frequency is less than the set value of Frequency
difference.
• The estimated breaker closing angle is decided to be less than the set value of
Difference angle.
Difference voltage
U_Line
fU_Bus fU_Line
Live line or bus value
Dead line or bus value Frequency[Hz]
Frequency deviation
Rated frequency
GUID-191F6C44-7A67-4277-8AD1-9711B535F1E1 V2 EN
When the frequency, phase angle and voltage conditions are fulfilled, the duration
of the synchronism conditions is checked so as to ensure that they are still met
when the condition is determined on the basis of the measured frequency and phase
difference. Depending on the circuit breaker and the closing system, the delay from
the moment the closing signal is given until the circuit breaker finally closes is
about 50 - 250 ms. The selected Closing time of CB informs the function how long
the conditions have to persist. The Synchro check function compensates for the
measured slip frequency and the circuit breaker closing delay. The phase angle
advance is calculated continuously with the formula.
TCB Total circuit breaker closing delay, including the delay of the IED output contacts defined with
the Closing time of CB setting parameter value
The closing angle is the estimated angle difference after the breaker closing delay.
The Minimum Syn time setting time can be set, if required, to demand the minimum
time within which conditions must be simultaneously fulfilled before the
SYNC_OK output is activated.
The measured voltage, frequency and phase angle difference values between the
two sides of the circuit breaker are available as monitored data values
U_DIFF_MEAS, FR_DIFF_MEAS and PH_DIFF_MEAS. Also, the indications of
the conditions that are not fulfilled and thus preventing the breaker closing
permission are available as monitored data values U_DIFF_SYNC,
PH_DIF_SYNC and FR_DIFF_SYNC. These monitored data values are updated
only when the Synchro check is enabled with the Synchro check mode setting and
the measured ENERG_STATE is "Both Live".
Continuous mode
The continuous mode is activated by setting the parameter Control mode to
"Continuous". In the continuous control mode, Synchro check is continuously
checking the synchronism. When synchronism is detected (according to the
settings), the SYNC_OK output is set to TRUE (logic '1') and it stays TRUE as long
as the conditions are fulfilled. The command input is ignored in the continuous
control mode. The mode is used for situations where Synchro check only gives the
permission to the control block that executes the CB closing.
Closing Closing
permission command
SECRSYN CBXCBR I
GUID-A9132EDC-BFAB-47CF-BB9D-FDE87EDE5FA5 V2 EN
Figure 247: A simplified block diagram of the Synchro check function in the
continuous mode operation
Command mode
If Control mode is set to "Command", the purpose of the Synchro check
functionality in the command mode is to find the instant when the voltages on both
sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism. The conditions for synchronism are
met when the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker have the same frequency
and are in phase with a magnitude that makes the concerned busbars or lines such
that they can be regarded as live.
Closing Closing
request command
CBXCBR SECRSYN I
GUID-820585ED-8AED-45B1-8FC2-2CEE7727A65C V2 EN
The closing signal is delivered only once for each activated external closing
command signal. The pulse length of the delivered closing is set with the Close
pulse setting.
t = Close pulse
GUID-0D9A1A7F-58D1-4081-B974-A3CE10DEC5AF V2 EN
In the command control mode operation, there are alarms for a failed closing
attempt (CL_FAIL_AL) and for a command signal that remains active too long
(CMD_FAIL_AL).
If the conditions for closing are not fulfilled within the set time of Maximum Syn
time, a failed closing attempt alarm is given. The CL_FAIL_AL alarm output
signal is pulse-shaped and the pulse length is 500 ms. If the external command
signal is removed too early, that is, before conditions are fulfilled and the closing
pulse is given, the alarm timer is reset.
GUID-FA8ADA22-6A90-4637-AA1C-714B1D0DD2CF V2 EN
The control module receives information about the circuit breaker status and thus is
able to adjust the command signal to be delivered to the Synchro check function. If
the external command signal CL_COMMAND is kept active longer than
necessary, the CMD_FAIL_AL alarm output is activated. The alarm indicates that
the control module has not removed the external command signal after the closing
operation. To avoid unnecessary alarms, the duration of the command signal
should be set in such a way that the maximum length of the signal is always below
Maximum Syn time + 5s.
Close pulse
5s
GUID-4DF3366D-33B9-48B5-8EB4-692D98016753 V2 EN
Figure 251: Determination of the alarm limit for a still-active command signal
Closing is permitted during Maximum Syn time, starting from the moment the
external command signal CL_COMMAND is activated. The CL_COMMAND input
must be kept active for the whole time that the closing conditions are waited to be
fulfilled. Otherwise, the procedure is cancelled. If the closing-command conditions
are fulfilled during Maximum Syn time, a closing pulse is delivered to the circuit
breaker. If the closing conditions are not fulfilled during the checking time, the
alarm CL_FAIL_AL is activated as an indication of a failed closing attempt. The
closing pulse is not delivered if the closing conditions become valid after Maximum
Syn time has elapsed. The closing pulse is delivered only once for each activated
external command signal, and a new closing-command sequence cannot be started
until the external command signal is reset and reactivated. The SYNC_INPRO
output is active when the closing-command sequence is in progress and it is reset
when the CL_COMMAND input is reset or Maximum Syn time has elapsed.
Bypass mode
SECRSYN can be set to the bypass mode by setting the parameters Synchrocheck
mode and Live dead mode to "Off" or alternatively by activating the BYPASS input.
In the bypass mode, the closing conditions are always considered to be fulfilled by
SECRSYN. Otherwise, the operation is similar to the normal mode.
The vector group of the power transformer is defined with clock numbers, where
the value of the hour pointer defines the low-voltage-side phasor and the high-voltage-
side phasor is always fixed to the clock number 12, which is same as zero. The
angle between clock numbers is 30 degrees. When comparing phase angles, the
U_BUS input is always the reference. This means that when the Yd11 power
transformer is used, the low-voltage-side voltage phasor leads by 30 degrees or
lags by 330 degrees the high-voltage-side phasor. The rotation of the phasors is
counterclockwise.
The generic rule is that a low-voltage-side phasor lags the high-voltage-side phasor
by clock number * 30º. This is called angle difference adjustment and can be set
for SECRSYN with the Phase shift setting.
9.3.5 Application
The main purpose of the synchrocheck function is to provide control over the
closing of the circuit breakers in power networks to prevent the closing if the
conditions for synchronism are not detected. This function is also used to prevent
the reconnection of two systems which are divided after islanding and a three-pole
reclosing.
The Synchro check function block includes both the synchronism check function
and the energizing function to allow closing when one side of the breaker is dead.
Network and the generator running in parallel with the network are connected
through the line AB. When a fault occurs between A and B, the IED protection
opens the circuit breakers A and B, thus isolating the faulty section from the
network and making the arc that caused the fault extinguish. The first attempt to
recover is a delayed autoreclosure made a few seconds later. Then, the autoreclose
function DARREC gives a command signal to the synchrocheck function to close
the circuit breaker A. SECRSYN performs an energizing check, as the line AB is de-
energized (U_BUS> Live bus value, U_LINE< Dead line value). After verifying
the line AB is dead and the energizing direction is correct, the IED energizes the
line (U_BUS -> U_LINE) by closing the circuit breaker A. The PLC of the power
plant discovers that the line has been energized and sends a signal to the other
synchrocheck function to close the circuit breaker B. Since both sides of the circuit
breaker B are live (U_BUS > Live bus value, U_LINE > Live bus value), the
synchrocheck function controlling the circuit breaker B performs a synchrocheck
and, if the network and the generator are in synchronism, closes the circuit breaker.
G
A B
SECRSYN SECRSYN
DARREC PLC
GUID-27A9936F-0276-47A1-B646-48E336FDA95C V2 EN
Connections
A special attention is paid to the connection of the IED. Furthermore it is checked
that the primary side wiring is correct.
A faulty wiring of the voltage inputs of the IED causes a malfunction in the
synchrocheck function. If the wires of an energizing input have changed places, the
polarity of the input voltage is reversed (180°). In this case, the IED permits the
circuit breaker closing in a situation where the voltages are in opposite phases. This
can damage the electrical devices in the primary circuit. Therefore, it is extremely
important that the wiring from the voltage transformers to the terminals on the rear
of the IED is consistent regarding the energizing inputs U_BUS (bus voltage) and
U_LINE (line voltage).
The wiring should be verified by checking the reading of the phase difference
measured between the U_BUS and U_LINE voltages. The phase difference
measured by the IED has to be close to zero within the permitted accuracy
tolerances. The measured phase differences are indicated in the LHMI. At the same
time, it is recommended to check the voltage difference and the frequency
differences presented in the monitored data view. These values should be within
the permitted tolerances, that is, close to zero.
Figure 253 shows an example where the synchrocheck is used for the circuit
breaker closing between a busbar and a line. The phase-to-phase voltages are
measured from the busbar and also one phase-to-phase voltage from the line is
measured.
GUID-DE29AFFC-9769-459B-B52C-4C11DC37A583 V3 EN
Figure 253: Connection of voltages for the IED and signals used in synchrocheck
9.3.6 Signals
Table 452: SECRSYN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_BUS SIGNAL 0 Busbar voltage
U_LINE SIGNAL 0 Line voltage
CL_COMMAND BOOLEAN 0=False External closing request
BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Request to bypass synchronism check and
voltage check
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Blocking signal of the synchro check and voltage
check function
9.3.7 Settings
Table 454: SECRSYN Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Live dead mode -1=Off 1=Both Dead Energizing check mode
1=Both Dead
2=Live L, Dead B
3=Dead L, Live B
4=Dead Bus, L Any
5=Dead L, Bus Any
6=One Live, Dead
7=Not Both Live
Difference voltage 0.01...0.50 xUn 0.01 0.05 Maximum voltage difference limit
Difference frequency 0.001...0.100 xFn 0.001 0.001 Maximum frequency difference limit
Difference angle 5...90 deg 1 5 Maximum angle difference limit
Voltage:
±3.0% of the set value or ±0.01 × Un
Frequency:
±10 mHz
Phase angle:
±3°
Reset time <50 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
9.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 logical IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
node name identification device number
Autoreclosing DARREC O-->I 79
A070836 V4 EN
9.4.3 Functionality
About 80 to 85 percent of faults in the MV overhead lines are transient and
automatically cleared with a momentary de-energization of the line. The rest of the
faults, 15 to 20 percent, can be cleared by longer interruptions. The de-energization
of the fault location for a selected time period is implemented through automatic
reclosing, during which most of the faults can be cleared.
The auto-reclose function AR can be used with any circuit breaker suitable for auto-
reclosing. The function provides five programmable auto-reclose shots which can
perform one to five successive auto-reclosings of desired type and duration, for
instance one high-speed and one delayed auto-reclosing.
When the reclosing is initiated with starting of the protection function, the auto-
reclose function can execute the final trip of the circuit breaker in a short operate
time, provided that the fault still persists when the last selected reclosing has been
carried out.
The Control line setting defines which of the initiation signals are protection start
and trip signals and which are not. With this setting, the user can distinguish the
blocking signals from the protection signals. The Control line setting is a bit mask,
that is, the lowest bit controls the INIT_1 line and the highest bit the INIT_6
line. Some example combinations of the Control line setting are as follows:
When the corresponding bit or bits in both the Control line setting and the INIT_X
line are TRUE:
• The CLOSE_CB output is blocked until the protection is reset
• If the INIT_X line defined as the protection signal is activated during the
discrimination time, the AR function goes to lockout
• If the INIT_X line defined as the protection signal stays active longer than the
time set by the Max trip time setting, the AR function goes to lockout (long trip)
• The UNSUC_RECL output is activated after a pre-defined two minutes
(alarming earth-fault).
Zone coordination is used in the zone sequence between local protection units and
downstream devices. At the falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line, the value of the
shot pointer is increased by one, unless a shot is in progress or the shot pointer
already has the maximum value.
The falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line is not accepted if any of the shots are in
progress.
With the cooperation between the AR units in the same IED or between IEDs,
sequential reclosings of two breakers at a line end in a 1½-breaker, double breaker
or ring-bus arrangement can be achieved. One unit is defined as a master and it
executes the reclosing first. If the reclosing is successful and no trip takes place, the
second unit, that is the slave, is released to complete the reclose shot. With
persistent faults, the breaker reclosing is limited to the first breaker.
A070877 V1 EN
If the terminal priority of the AR unit is set to "none", the AR unit skips all these
actions.
An alarm or start signal from the thermal overload protection (T1PTTR) can be
routed to the input BLK_THERM to block and hold the reclose sequence. The
BLK_THERM signal does not affect the starting of the sequence. When the reclose
time has elapsed and the BLK_THERM input is active, the shot is not ready until the
BLK_THERM input deactivates. Should the BLK_THERM input remain active
longer than the time set by the setting Max block time, the AR function goes to lockout.
If the BLK_THERM input is activated when the auto wait timer is running, the auto
wait timer is reset and the timer restarted when the BLK_THERM input deactivates.
The reclosing operation can be enabled and disabled with the Reclosing operation
setting. This setting does not disable the function, only the reclosing functionality.
The setting has three parameter values: “On”, “External Ctl” and ”Off”. The setting
value “On” enables the reclosing operation and “Off” disables it. When the setting
value “External Ctl” is selected, the reclosing operation is controlled with the
RECL_ON input. AR_ON is activated when reclosing operation is enabled.
A070864 V3 EN
A070865 V2 EN
In total, the AR function contains six separate initiation lines used for the initiation
or blocking of the auto-reclose shots. These lines are divided into two types of
channels. In three of these channels, the signal to the AR function can be delayed,
whereas the other three channels do not have any delaying capability.
Each channel that is capable of delaying a start signal has four time delays. The
time delay is selected based on the shot pointer in the AR function. For the first
reclose attempt, the first time delay is selected; for the second attempt, the second
time delay and so on. For the fourth and fifth attempts, the time delays are the same.
Normally, only two or three reclosing attempts are made. The third and fourth
attempts are used to provide the so-called fast final trip to lockout.
OR CB_TRIP
DARREC
FPHLPTOC INIT_1 OPEN_CB
I_A OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB CB_CLOSE
INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
I_B START
INIT_4 INPRO
I_C INIT_5 LOCKED
BLOCK INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL
ENA_MULT
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
CB_POSITION CB_POS
CB_READY CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
RECL_ON
SYNC
GUID-AD00D3A3-0ACC-405B-82A5-3D340BBAEDE4 V1 EN
Delayed DEL_INIT_2...4 signals are used only when the auto-reclose shot is
initiated with the start signal of a protection stage. After a start delay, the AR
function opens the circuit breaker and an auto-reclose shot is initiated. When the
shot is initiated with the trip signal of the protection, the protection function trips
the circuit breaker and simultaneously initiates the auto-reclose shot.
If the circuit breaker is manually closed against the fault, that is, if SOTF is used,
the fourth time delay can automatically be taken into use. This is controlled with
the internal logic of the AR function and the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter.
A typical auto-reclose situation is where one auto-reclose shot has been performed
after the fault was detected. There are two types of such cases: operation initiated
with protection start signal and operation initiated with protection trip signal. In
both cases, the auto-reclose sequence is successful: the reclaim time elapses and no
new sequence is started.
A070867 V1 EN
The auto-reclose shot is initiated with a start signal of the protection function after
the start delay time has elapsed. The auto-reclose starts when the Str 2 delay shot 1
setting elapses.
A070868 V1 EN
The auto-reclose shot is initiated with a trip signal of the protection function. The
auto-reclose starts when the protection operate delay time elapses.
Normally, all trip and start signals are used to initiate an auto-reclose shot and trip
the circuit breaker. ACTIVE output indicates reclosing sequence in progress. If any
of the input signals INIT_X or DEL_INIT_X are used for blocking, the
corresponding bit in the Tripping line setting must be FALSE. This is to ensure that
the circuit breaker does not trip from that signal, that is, the signal does not activate
the OPEN_CB output. The default value for the setting is "63", which means that
all initiation signals activate the OPEN_CB output. The lowest bit in the Tripping
line setting corresponds to the INIT_1 input, the highest bit to the INIT_6 line.
A070869 V1 EN
In the AR function, each shot can be programmed to locate anywhere in the reclose
scheme matrix. The shots are like building blocks used to design the reclose
program. The building blocks are called CBBs. All blocks are alike and have
settings which give the attempt number (columns in the matrix), the initiation or
blocking signals (rows in the matrix) and the reclose time of the shot.
The reclose time defines the open and dead times, that is, the time between the
OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB commands. The Init signals CBBx setting defines
the initiation signals. The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that
are related to the CBB (rows in the matrix). The Shot number CBB1…CBB7 setting
defines which shot is related to the CBB (columns in the matrix). For example,
CBB1 settings are:
If a shot is initiated from the INIT_1 line, only one shot is allowed before
lockout. If a shot is initiated from the INIT_3 line, three shots are allowed before
lockout.
A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots. In a
situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 lines, a
third shot is allowed, that is, CBB3 is allowed to start. This is called conditional
lockout. If the initiation is made from the INIT_2 and INIT_3 lines, an
immediate lockout occurs.
The INIT_5 line is used for blocking purposes. If the INIT_5 line is active
during a sequence start, the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to
lockout.
If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer, the CBB
with the smallest individual number is always selected. For
example, if the INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the
second shot, that is, the shot pointer is 2, CBB2 is started instead of
CBB5.
Even if the initiation signals are not received from the protection functions, the AR
function can be set to continue from the second to the fifth reclose shot. The AR
function can, for example, be requested to automatically continue with the
sequence when the circuit breaker fails to close when requested. In such a case, the
AR function issues a CLOSE_CB command. When the wait close time elapses, that
is, the closing of the circuit breaker fails, the next shot is automatically started.
Another example is the embedded generation on the power line, which can make
the synchronism check fail and prevent the reclosing. If the auto-reclose sequence
is continued to the second shot, a successful synchronous reclosing is more likely
than with the first shot, since the second shot lasts longer than the first one.
A070870 V1 EN
Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the
following:
The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated
in the auto-initiation. The default value for this parameter is "0",
which means that no auto-initiation is selected.
A070871 V1 EN
In the first shot, the synchronization condition is not fulfilled (SYNC is FALSE).
When the auto wait timer elapses, the sequence continues to the second shot.
During the second reclosing, the synchronization condition is fulfilled and the close
command is given to the circuit breaker after the second reclose time has elapsed.
After the second shot, the circuit breaker fails to close when the wait close time has
elapsed. The third shot is started and a new close command is given after the third
reclose time has elapsed. The circuit breaker closes normally and the reclaim time
starts. When the reclaim time has elapsed, the sequence is concluded successful.
The shot pointer starts from an initial value "1" and determines according to the
settings whether or not a certain shot is allowed to be initiated. After every shot,
the shot pointer value increases. This is carried out until a successful reclosing or
lockout takes place after a complete shot sequence containing a total of five shots.
A070872 V1 EN
Every time the shot pointer increases, the reclaim time starts. When the reclaim
time ends, the shot pointer sets to its initial value, unless no new shot is initiated.
The shot pointer increases when the reclose time elapses or at the falling edge of
the INC_SHOTP signal.
When SHOT_PTR has the value six, the AR function is in a so called pre-lockout
state. If a new initiation occurs during the pre-lockout state, the AR function goes
to lockout. Therefore, a new sequence initiation during the pre-lockout state is not
possible.
The reclose controller calculates the reclose, discrimination and reclaim times. The
reclose time is started when the INPRO signal is activated, that is, when the
sequence starts and the activated CBB defines the reclose time.
When the reclose time has elapsed, the CLOSE_CB output is not activated until the
following conditions are fulfilled:
• The SYNC input must be TRUE if the particular CBB requires information
about the synchronism
• All AR initiation inputs that are defined protection lines (using the Control
line setting) are inactive
• The circuit breaker is open
• The circuit breaker is ready for the close command, that is, the CB_READY
input is TRUE. This is indicated by active READY output.
If at least one of the conditions is not fulfilled within the time set with the Auto
wait time parameter, the auto-reclose sequence is locked.
The synchronism requirement for the CBBs can be defined with the
Synchronisation set setting, which is a bit mask. The lowest bit in the
Synchronisation set setting is related to CBB1 and the highest bit to CBB7. For
example, if the setting is set to "1", only CBB1 requires synchronism. If the setting
is it set to "7", CBB1, CBB2 and CBB3 require the SYNC input to be TRUE before
the reclosing command can be given.
A070873 V1 EN
The discrimination time starts when the close command CLOSE_CB has been
given. If a start input is activated before the discrimination time has elapsed, the
AR function goes to lockout. The default value for each discrimination time is
zero. The discrimination time can be adjusted with the Dsr time shot 1…4 parameter.
A070874 V1 EN
Figure 266: Initiation after elapsed discrimination time - new shot begins
When the LOCKED output is active, the AR function is in lockout. This means that
new sequences cannot be initialized, because AR is insensitive to initiation
commands. It can be released from the lockout state in the following ways.
• The function is reset through communication with the RsRec parameter. The
same functionality can also be found in the Clear menu (DARREC1 reset).
• The lockout is automatically reset after the reclaim time, if the Auto lockout
reset setting is in use.
If the Auto lockout reset setting is not in use, the lockout can be
released only with the RsRec parameter.
• The frequent operation counter limit is reached and new sequence is initiated.
The lockout is released when the recovery timer elapses.
• The protection trip signal has been active longer than the time set with the Max
wait time parameter since the shot initiation.
• The circuit breaker is closed manually during an autoreclosing sequence and
the manual close mode is FALSE.
The PROT_CRD output is used for controlling the protection functions. In several
applications, such as fuse-saving applications involving down-stream fuses,
tripping and initiation of shot 1 should be fast (instantaneous or short-time
delayed). The tripping and initiation of shots 2, 3 and definite tripping time should
be delayed.
In this example, two overcurrent elements PHLPTOC and PHIPTOC are used.
PHIPTOC is given an instantaneous characteristic and PHLPTOC is given a time
delay.
The PROT_CRD output is activated, if the SHOT_PTR value is the same or higher
than the value defined with the Protection crd limit setting and all initialization
signals have been reset. The PROT_CRD output is reset under the following
conditions:
• If the cut-out time elapses
• If the reclaim time elapses and the AR function is ready for a new sequence
• If the AR function is in lockout or disabled, that is, if the value of the
Protection crd mode setting is "AR inoperative" or "AR inop, CB man".
The PROT_CRD output can also be controlled with the Protection crd mode
setting. The setting has the following modes:
• "no condition": the PROT_CRD output is controlled only with the Protection
crd limit setting
• "AR inoperative": the PROT_CRD output is active, if the AR function is
disabled or in the lockout state, or if the INHIBIT_RECL input is active
• "CB close manual": the PROT_CRD output is active for the reclaim time if the
circuit breaker has been manually closed, that is, the AR function has not
issued a close command
• "AR inop, CB man": both the modes "AR inoperative" and "CB close manual"
are effective
• "always": the PROT_CRD output is constantly active
A070875 V3 EN
Figure 267: Configuration example of using the PROT_CRD output for protection
blocking
If the Protection crd limit setting has the value "1", the instantaneous three-phase
overcurrent protection function PHIPTOC is disabled or blocked after the first shot.
The circuit breaker position information is controlled with the CB closed Pos status
setting. The setting value "TRUE” means that when the circuit breaker is closed,
the CB_POS input is TRUE. When the setting value is “FALSE”, the CB_POS
input is FALSE, provided that the circuit breaker is closed. The reclose command
pulse time can be controlled with the Close pulse time setting: the CLOSE_CB
output is active for the time set with the Close pulse time setting. The CLOSE_CB
output is deactivated also when the circuit breaker is detected to be closed, that is,
when the CB_POS input changes from open state to closed state. The Wait close
time setting defines the time after the CLOSE_CB command activation, during
which the circuit breaker should be closed. If the closing of circuit breaker does not
happen during this time, the auto-reclose function is driven to lockout or, if
allowed, an auto-initiation is activated.
The main motivation for auto-reclosing to begin with is the assumption that the
fault is temporary by nature, and that a momentary de-energizing of the power line
and an automatic reclosing restores the power supply. However, when the power
line is manually energized and an immediate protection trip is detected, it is very
likely that the fault is of a permanent type. A permanent fault is, for example,
energizing a power line into a forgotten earthing after a maintenance work along
the power line. In such cases, SOTF is activated, but only for the reclaim time after
energizing the power line and only when the circuit breaker is closed manually and
not by the AR function.
SOTF disables any initiation of an auto-reclose shot. The energizing of the power
line is detected from the CB_POS information.
If the Manual close mode setting is set to FALSE and the circuit
breaker has been manually closed during an auto-reclose shot, the
AR unit goes to an immediate lockout.
If the Manual close mode setting is set to TRUE and the circuit
breaker has been manually closed during an auto-reclose shot (the
INPRO is active), the shot is considered as completed.
The Frq Op counter limit setting defines the number of reclose attempts that are
allowed during the time defined with the Frq Op counter time setting. If the set
value is reached within a pre-defined period defined with the Frq Op counter time
setting, the AR function goes to lockout when a new shot begins, provided that the
counter is still above the set limit. The lockout is released after the recovery time
has elapsed. The recovery time can be defined with the Frq Op recovery time setting .
If the circuit breaker is manually closed during the recovery time, the reclaim time
is activated after the recovery timer has elapsed.
9.4.5 Counters
The AR function contains six counters. Their values are stored in a semi-retain
memory. The counters are increased at the rising edge of the reclosing command.
The counters count the following situations.
• COUNTER: counts every reclosing command activation
• CNT_SHOT1: counts reclosing commands that are executed from shot 1
• CNT_SHOT2: counts reclosing commands that are executed from shot 2
The counters are disabled through communication with the DsaCnt parameter.
When the counters are disabled, the values are not updated.
The counters are reset through communication with the RsCnt parameter. The same
functionality can also be found in the clear menu (DARREC1 counters).
9.4.6 Application
Modern electric power systems can deliver energy to users very reliably. However,
different kind of faults can occur. Protection relays play an important role in
detecting failures or abnormalities in the system. They detect faults and give
commands for corresponding circuit breakers to isolate the defective element
before excessive damage or a possible power system collapse occurs. A fast
isolation also limits the disturbances caused for the healthy parts of the power system.
In overhead lines, the insulating material between phase conductors is air. The
majority of the faults are flash-over arcing faults caused by lightning, for example.
Only a short interruption is needed for extinguishing the arc. These faults are
transient by nature.
A semi-transient fault can be caused for example by a bird or a tree branch falling
on the overhead line. The fault disappears on its own if the fault current burns the
branch or the wind blows it away.
The basic idea of the auto-reclose function is simple. In overhead lines, where the
possibility of self-clearing faults is high, the auto-reclose function tries to restore
the power by reclosing the breaker. This is a method to get the power system back
into normal operation by removing the transient or semi-transient faults. Several
trials, that is, auto-reclose shots are allowed. If none of the trials is successful and
the fault persists, definite final tripping follows.
The auto-reclose function can be used with every circuit breaker that has the ability
for a reclosing sequence. In DARREC auto-reclose function the implementing
method of auto-reclose sequences is patented by ABB
auto-reclose shot an operation where after a preset time the breaker is closed from the breaker
tripping caused by protection
auto-reclose a predefined method to do reclose attempts (shots) to restore the power system
sequence
SOTF If the protection detects a fault immediately after an open circuit breaker has
been closed, it indicates that the fault was already there. It can be, for example,
a forgotten earthing after maintenance work. Such closing of the circuit breaker
is known as switch on to fault. Autoreclosing in such conditions is prohibited.
final trip Occurs in case of a permanent fault, when the circuit breaker is opened for the
last time after all programmed auto-reclose operations. Since no auto-reclosing
follows, the circuit breaker remains open. This is called final trip or definite trip.
A070869 V1 EN
In the AR function, each shot can be programmed to locate anywhere in the reclose
scheme matrix. The shots are like building blocks used to design the reclose
program. The building blocks are called CBBs. All blocks are alike and have
settings which give the attempt number (columns in the matrix), the initiation or
blocking signals (rows in the matrix) and the reclose time of the shot.
The reclose time defines the open and dead times, that is, the time between the
OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB commands. The Init signals CBBx setting defines
the initiation signals. The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that
are related to the CBB (rows in the matrix). The Shot number CBB1…CBB7 setting
defines which shot is related to the CBB (columns in the matrix). For example,
CBB1 settings are:
• First reclose time = 1.0s
• Init signals CBB1 = 7 (three lowest bits: 111000 = 7)
• Blk signals CBB1 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB1 = 1
If a shot is initiated from the INIT_1 line, only one shot is allowed before
lockout. If a shot is initiated from the INIT_3 line, three shots are allowed before
lockout.
A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots. In a
situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 lines, a
third shot is allowed, that is, CBB3 is allowed to start. This is called conditional
lockout. If the initiation is made from the INIT_2 and INIT_3 lines, an
immediate lockout occurs.
The INIT_5 line is used for blocking purposes. If the INIT_5 line is active
during a sequence start, the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to
lockout.
If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer, the CBB
with the smallest individual number is always selected. For
example, if the INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the
second shot, that is, the shot pointer is 2, CBB2 is started instead of
CBB5.
Even if the initiation signals are not received from the protection functions, the AR
function can be set to continue from the second to the fifth reclose shot. The AR
function can, for example, be requested to automatically continue with the
sequence when the circuit breaker fails to close when requested. In such a case, the
AR function issues a CLOSE_CB command. When the wait close time elapses, that
is, the closing of the circuit breaker fails, the next shot is automatically started.
Another example is the embedded generation on the power line, which can make
the synchronism check fail and prevent the reclosing. If the auto-reclose sequence
is continued to the second shot, a successful synchronous reclosing is more likely
than with the first shot, since the second shot lasts longer than the first one.
A070870 V1 EN
Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the
following:
• Not allowed: no automatic initiation is allowed
• When the synchronization fails, the automatic initiation is carried out when the
auto wait time elapses and the reclosing is prevented due to a failure during the
synchronism check
• When the circuit breaker does not close, the automatic initiation is carried out
if the circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the
reclose command
• Both: the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the
circuit breaker does not close.
The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated
in the auto-initiation. The default value for this parameter is "0",
which means that no auto-initiation is selected.
A070871 V1 EN
In the first shot, the synchronization condition is not fulfilled (SYNC is FALSE).
When the auto wait timer elapses, the sequence continues to the second shot.
During the second reclosing, the synchronization condition is fulfilled and the close
command is given to the circuit breaker after the second reclose time has elapsed.
After the second shot, the circuit breaker fails to close when the wait close time has
elapsed. The third shot is started and a new close command is given after the third
reclose time has elapsed. The circuit breaker closes normally and the reclaim time
starts. When the reclaim time has elapsed, the sequence is concluded successful.
9.4.6.2 Sequence
The auto reclose sequence is implemented by using CBBs. The highest possible
amount of CBBs is seven. If the user wants to have, for example, a sequence of
three shots, only the first three CBBs are needed. Using building blocks instead of
fixed shots gives enhanced flexibility, allowing multiple and adaptive sequences.
Each CBB is identical. The Shot number CBB_ setting defines at which point in the
auto-reclose sequence the CBB should be performed, that is, whether the particular
CBB is going to be the first, second, third, fourth or fifth shot.
During the initiation of a CBB, the conditions of initiation and blocking are
checked. This is done for all CBBs simultaneously. Each CBB that fulfils the
initiation conditions requests an execution.
The function also keeps track of shots already performed, that is, at which point the
auto-reclose sequence is from shot 1 to lockout. For example, if shots 1 and 2 have
already been performed, only shots 3 to 5 are allowed.
• Only such CBBs that are set for the next shot in the sequence can be accepted
for execution. For example, if the next shot in the sequence should be shot 2, a
request from CBB set for shot 3 is rejected.
• Any CBB that is set for the next shot or any of the following shots can be
accepted for execution. For example, if the next shot in the sequence should be
shot 2, also CBBs that are set for shots 3, 4 and 5 are accepted. In other words,
shot 2 can be ignored.
In case there are multiple CBBs allowed for execution, the CBB with the smallest
number is chosen. For example, if CBB2 and CBB4 request an execution, CBB2 is
allowed to execute the shot.
OR CB_ TRIP
PHHPTOC DARREC
I_A OPERATE INIT_1 OPEN_CB
INIT_2 CLOSE_CB CB_ CLOSE
I_B START
INIT_3 CMD_ WAIT
I_C INIT_4 INPRO
BLOCK INIT_5 LOCKED
INIT_6 PROT_ CRD
ENA_ MULT UNSUC_ RECL
DEL_ INIT_2
DEL_ INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_ INIT_4 READY
FPHLPTOC
BLK_ RECL_T
I_A OPERATE BLK_ RCLM_T
I_B START BLK_ THERM
CB_ POS
I_C CB_ READY
BLOCK INC_ SHOTP
INHIBIT_ RECL
ENA_ MULT
RECL_ON
SYNC
FEFLPTOC
Io OPERATE
BLOCK START
ENA_ MULT
Example 1.
The sequence is implemented by two shots which have the same reclosing time for
all protection functions, namely I>>, I> and Io>. The initiation of the shots is done
by activating the operating signals of the protection functions.
A070887 V1 EN
tProtection Operating time for the protection stage to clear the fault
In this case, the sequence needs two CBBs. The reclosing times for shot 1 and shot
2 are different, but each protection function initiates the same sequence. The CBB
sequence is described in Table 460 as follows:
A071270 V2 EN
Example 2
There are two separate sequences implemented with three shots. Shot 1 is
implemented by CBB1 and it is initiated with the high stage of the overcurrent
protection (I>>). Shot 1 is set as a high-speed autoreclosing with a short time
delay. Shot 2 is implemented with CBB2 and meant to be the first shot of the
autoreclose sequence initiated by the low stage of the overcurrent protection (I>)
and the low stage of the non-directional earth-fault protection (Io>). It has the same
reclosing time in both situations. It is set as a high-speed autoreclosing for
corresponding faults. The third shot, which is the second shot in the autoreclose
sequence initiated by I> or Io>, is set as a delayed autoreclosing and executed after
an unsuccessful high-speed autoreclosing of a corresponding sequence.
A071272 V1 EN
Figure 274: Autoreclosing sequence with two shots with different shot settings
according to initiation signal
tl>> Operating time for the I>> protection stage to clear the fault
tl> or lo> Operating time for the I> or Io> protection stage to clear the fault
In this case, the number of needed CBBs is three, that is, the first shot's reclosing
time depends on the initiation signal.
Shot 1
INIT_1 (I>>) (CBB1) Lockout
1.0s
A071274 V2 EN
If the sequence is initiated from the INIT_1 line, that is, the overcurrent
protection high stage, the sequence is one shot long. If the sequence is initiated
from the INIT_2 or INIT_3 lines, the sequence is two shots long.
• DEL_INIT_2
• DEL_INIT_3
• DEL_INIT_4
DEL_INIT_2 and INIT_2 are connected together with an OR-gate, as are inputs
3 and 4. Inputs 1, 5 and 6 do not have any delayed input. From the auto-reclosing
point of view, it does not matter whether INIT_x or DEL_INIT_x line is used
for shot initiation or blocking.
The auto-reclose function can also open the circuit breaker from any of the
initiation lines. It is selected with the Tripping line setting. As a default, all
initiation lines activate the OPEN_CB output.
A070276 V1 EN
In it simplest, all auto-reclose shots are initiated by protection trips. As a result, all
trip times in the sequence are the same. This is why using protection trips may not
be the optimal solution. Using protection start signals instead of protection trips for
initiating shots shortens the trip times.
Example 1
When a two-shot-sequence is used, the start information from the protection
function is routed to the DEL_INIT 2 input and the operate information to the
INIT_2 input. The following conditions have to apply:
Example 2
The delays can be used also for fast final trip. The conditions are the same as in
Example 1, with the exception of Str 2 delay shot 3 = 0.10 seconds.
The operation in a permanent fault is the same as in Example 1, except that after
the second shot when the protection starts again, Str 2 delay shot 3 elapses before
the protection operate time and the final trip follows. The total trip time is the
protection start delay + 0.10 seconds + the time it takes to open the circuit breaker.
The Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays can also be used to achieve a fast and
accelerated trip with SOTF. This is done by setting the Fourth delay in SOTF
When the function detects a closing of the circuit breaker, that is, any other closing
except the reclosing done by the function itself, it always prohibits shot initiation
for the time set with the Reclaim time parameter. Furthermore, if the Fourth delay
in SOTF parameter is "1", the Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays are also activated.
Example 1
The protection operation time is 0.5 seconds, the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter
is set to "1" and the Str 2 delay shot 4 parameter is 0.05 seconds. The protection
start signal is connected to the DEL_INIT_2 input.
If the protection starts after the circuit breaker closes, the fast trip follows after the
set 0.05 seconds. The total trip time is the protection start delay + 0.05 seconds +
the time it takes to open the circuit breaker.
9.4.7 Signals
Table 463: DARREC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INIT_1 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 1
INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 2
INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 3
INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 4
INIT_5 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 5
INIT_6 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 6
DEL_INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0=False Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 2
DEL_INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0=False Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 3
DEL_INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0=False Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 4
BLK_RECL_T BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks and resets reclose time
BLK_RCLM_T BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks and resets reclaim time
BLK_THERM BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks and holds the reclose shot from the
thermal overload
CB_POS BOOLEAN 0=False Circuit breaker position input
CB_READY BOOLEAN 1=True Circuit breaker status signal
INC_SHOTP BOOLEAN 0=False A zone sequence coordination signal
INHIBIT_RECL BOOLEAN 0=False Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
RECL_ON BOOLEAN 0=False Level sensitive signal for allowing (high) / not
allowing (low) reclosing
SYNC BOOLEAN 0=False Synchronizing check fulfilled
9.4.8 Settings
Table 465: DARREC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off/On
5=off
Reclosing operation 1=Off 1=Off Reclosing operation (Off, External Ctl /
2=External Ctl On)
3=On
Manual close mode 0=False 0=False Manual close mode
1=True
Wait close time 50...10000 ms 50 250 Allowed CB closing time after reclose
command
Max wait time 100...1800000 ms 100 10000 Maximum wait time for haltDeadTime
release
Max trip time 100...10000 ms 100 10000 Maximum wait time for deactivation of
protection signals
Close pulse time 10...10000 ms 10 200 CB close pulse time
Max Thm block time 100...1800000 ms 100 10000 Maximum wait time for thermal blocking
signal deactivation
Cut-out time 0...1800000 ms 100 10000 Cutout time for protection coordination
Reclaim time 100...1800000 ms 100 10000 Reclaim time
Dsr time shot 1 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for first reclosing
Dsr time shot 2 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for second reclosing
Dsr time shot 3 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for third reclosing
Dsr time shot 4 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for fourth reclosing
Terminal priority 1=None 1=None Terminal priority
2=Low (follower)
3=High (master)
Table continues on next page
10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current total demand distortion CMHAI PQM3I PQM3I
monitoring
GUID-62495CAB-20DF-4BBA-9D5C-ECDE1D2AAB52 V1 EN
10.1.3 Functionality
The distortion monitoring function CMHAI is used for monitoring the current total
demand distortion TDD.
The operation of the current distortion monitoring function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
I_A
Distortion
Demand
I_B measure- ALARM
calculation
ment
I_C
BLOCK
GUID-E5EC5FFE-7679-445B-B327-A8B1759D90C4 V1 EN
Distortion measurement
The distortion measurement module measures harmonics up to the 11th harmonic.
The total demand distortion TDD is calculated from the measured harmonic
components with the formula
N
TDD =
∑ k =2 I k2
I max_ demand
GUID-9F532219-6991-4F61-8DB6-0D6A0AA9AC29 V1 EN (Equation 53)
Demand calculation
The demand value for TDD is calculated separately for each phase. If any of the
calculated total demand distortion values is above the set alarm limit TDD alarm
limit, the ALARM output is activated.
The demand calculation window is set with the Demand interval setting. It has
seven window lengths from "1 minute" to "180 minutes". The window type can be
set with the Demand window setting. The available options are "Sliding" and "Non-
sliding".
10.1.5 Application
In standards, the power quality is defined through the characteristics of the supply
voltage. Transients, short-duration and long-duration voltage variations, unbalance
and waveform distortions are the key characteristics describing power quality.
Power quality is, however, a customer-driven issue. It could be said that any power
Power quality monitoring is an essential service that utilities can provide for their
industrial and key customers. Not only can a monitoring system provide
information about system disturbances and their possible causes, it can also detect
problem conditions throughout the system before they cause customer complaints,
equipment malfunctions and even equipment damage or failure. Power quality
problems are not limited to the utility side of the system. In fact, the majority of
power quality problems are localized within customer facilities. Thus, power
quality monitoring is not only an effective customer service strategy but also a way
to protect a utility's reputation for quality power and service.
CMHAI provides a method for monitoring the power quality by means of the
current waveform distortion. CMHAI provides a short-term 3-second average and a
long-term demand for TDD.
10.1.6 Signals
Table 469: CMHAI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A Signal 0 Phase A current
I_B Signal 0 Phase B current
I_C Signal 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs
10.1.7 Settings
Table 471: CMHAI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Demand interval 0=1 minute 2=10 minutes Time interval for demand calculation
1=5 minutes
2=10 minutes
3=15 minutes
4=30 minutes
5=60 minutes
6=180 minutes
Demand window 1=Sliding 1=Sliding Demand calculation window type
2=Non-sliding
TDD alarm limit 1.0...100.0 % 0.1 50.0 TDD alarm limit
Initial Dmd current 0.10...1.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 Initial demand current
10.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI PQM3U PQM3V
monitoring
GUID-CF203BDC-8C9A-442C-8D31-1AD55110469C V1 EN
10.2.3 Functionality
The distortion monitoring function VMHAI is used for monitoring the voltage total
harmonic distortion THD.
The operation of the voltage distortion monitoring function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
U_A_AB
Distortion
Demand
U_B_BC measure- ALARM
calculation
ment
U_C_CA
BLOCK
GUID-615D1A8A-621A-4AFA-ABB0-C681208AE62C V1 EN
Distortion measurement
The distortion measurement module measures harmonics up to the 11th harmonic.
The total harmonic distortion THD for voltage is calculated from the measured
harmonic components with the formula
N
THD =
∑ k =2U k2
U1
GUID-83A22E8C-5F4D-4332-A832-4E48B35550EF V1 EN (Equation 54)
Demand calculation
The demand value for THD is calculated separately for each phase. If any of the
calculated demand THD values is above the set alarm limit THD alarm limit, the
ALARM output is activated.
The demand calculation window is set with the Demand interval setting. It has
seven window lengths from "1 minute" to "180 minutes". The window type can be
set with the Demand window setting. The available options are "Sliding" and "Non-
sliding".
10.2.5 Application
VMHAI provides a method for monitoring the power quality by means of the
voltage waveform distortion. VMHAI provides a short-term three-second average
and long-term demand for THD.
10.2.6 Signals
Table 473: VMHAI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage A or phase-to-phase
voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage B or phase-to-phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage C or phase-to-phase
voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs
10.2.7 Settings
Table 475: VMHAI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Demand interval 0=1 minute 2=10 minutes Time interval for demand calculation
1=5 minutes
2=10 minutes
3=15 minutes
4=30 minutes
5=60 minutes
6=180 minutes
Demand window 1=Sliding 1=Sliding Demand calculation window type
2=Non-sliding
THD alarm limit 1.0...100.0 % 0.1 50.0 THD alarm limit
10.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage variation detection function PHQVVR PQMU PQMV
GUID-9AA7CE99-C11C-4312-89B4-1C015476A165 V1 EN
10.3.3 Functionality
The voltage variation measurement function PHQVVR is used for measuring the
short-duration voltage variations in distribution networks.
Typically, short-duration voltage variations are defined to last more than half of the
nominal frequency period and less than one minute. The maximum magnitude (in
the case of a voltage swell) or depth (in the case of a voltage dip or interruption)
and the duration of the variation can be obtained by measuring the RMS value of
the voltage for each phase. International standard 61000-4-30 defines the voltage
variation to be implemented using the RMS value of the voltage. IEEE standard
1159-1995 provides recommendations for monitoring the electric power quality of
the single-phase and polyphase ac power systems.
The operation of the voltage variation detection function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
U_A
U_B
U_C
I_A
I_B
I_C
GUID-91ED3E3D-F014-49EE-B4B0-DAD2509DD013 V1 EN
PHQVVR is designed for both single-phase and polyphase ac power systems, and
selection can be made with the Phase mode setting, which can be set either to the
"Single Phase" or "Three Phase" mode. The default setting is "Single Phase".
The basic difference between these alternatives depends on how many phases are
needed to have the voltage variation activated. When the Phase mode setting is
"Single Phase", the activation is straightforward. There is no dependence between
the phases for variation start. The START output and the corresponding phase start
are activated when the limit is exceeded or undershot. The corresponding phase
start deactivation takes place when the limit (includes small hysteresis) is
undershot or exceeded. The START output is deactivated when there are no more
active phases.
However, when Phase mode is "Three Phase", all the monitored phase signal
magnitudes, defined with Phase supervision, have to fall below or rise above the
limit setting to activate the START output and the corresponding phase output, that
is, all the monitored phases have to be activated. Accordingly, the deactivation
occurs when the activation requirement is not fulfilled, that is, one or more
monitored phase signal magnitudes return beyond their limits. Phases do not need
to be activated by the same variation type to activate the START output. Another
consequence is that if only one or two phases are monitored, it is sufficient that
these monitored phases activate the START output.
The module compares the measured voltage against the limit settings. If there is a
permanent undervoltage or overvoltage, the Reference voltage setting can be set to
this voltage level to avoid the undesired voltage dip or swell indications. This is
accomplished by converting the variation limits with the Reference voltage setting
in the variation detection module, that is, when there is a voltage different from the
nominal voltage, the Reference voltage setting is set to this voltage.
The Variation enable setting is used for enabling or disabling the variation types.
By default, the setting value is "Swell+dip+Int" and all the alternative variation
types are indicated. For example, for setting "Swell+dip", the interruption detection
is not active and only swell or dip events are indicated.
In a case where Phase mode is "Single Phase" and the dip functionality is
available, the output DIPST is activated when the measured TRMS value drops
below the Voltage dip set 3 setting in one phase and also remains above the
Voltage Int set setting. If the voltage drops below the Voltage Int set setting, the
output INTST is activated. INTST is deactivated when the voltage value rises
above the setting Voltage Int set. When the same measured TRMS magnitude rises
above the setting Voltage swell set 3, the SWELLST output is activated.
There are three setting value limits for dip (Voltage dip set 1..3) and swell
activation (Voltage swell set 1..3) and one setting value limit for interruption.
If Phase mode is "Three Phase", the DIPST and INTST outputs are
activated when the voltage levels of all monitored phases, defined
with the parameter Phase supervision, drop below the Voltage Int
set setting value. An example for the detection principle of voltage
interruption for "Three Phase" when Phase supervision is "Ph A +
B + C", and also the corresponding start signals when Phase mode
is "Single Phase", are as shown in the example for the detection of a
three-phase interruption.
U_C
U_B
Voltage dip set
SWELLST TRUE
FALSE
DIPST TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
A) Three phase mode
SWELLST TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
The module measures voltage variation magnitude on each phase separately, that
is, there are phase-segregated outputs ST_A, ST_B and ST_C for voltage variation
indication. The configuration parameter Phase supervision defines which voltage
phase or phases are monitored. If a voltage phase is selected to be monitored, the
function assumes it to be connected to a voltage measurement channel. In other
words, if an unconnected phase is monitored, the function falsely detects a voltage
interruption in that phase.
The maximum magnitude and depth are defined as percentage values calculated
from the difference between the reference and the measured voltage. For example,
a dip to 70 percent means that the minimum voltage dip magnitude variation is 70
percent of the reference voltage amplitude.
The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function and outputs.
The validation criterion for voltage variation is that the measured total variation
duration is between the set minimum and maximum durations (Either one of VVa
dip time 1, VVa swell time 1 or VVa Int time 1, depending on the variation type, and
VVa Dur Max). The maximum variation duration setting is the same for all
variation types.
Figure 284 shows voltage dip operational regions. In Figure 283, only one voltage
dip/swell/Int set is drawn, whereas in this figure there are three sub-limits for the
dip operation. When Voltage dip set 3 is undershot, the corresponding ST_x and
also the DIPST outputs are activated. When the TRMS voltage magnitude remains
between Voltage dip set 2 and Voltage dip set 1 for a period longer than VVa dip
time 2 (shorter time than VVa dip time 3), a momentary dip event is detected.
Furthermore, if the signal magnitude stays between the limits longer than VVa dip
time 3 (shorter time than VVa Dur max), a temporary dip event is detected. If the
voltage remains below Voltage dip set 1 for a period longer than VVa dip time 1 but
a shorter time than VVa dip time 2, an instantaneous dip event is detected.
For an event detection, the OPERATE output is always activated for one task cycle.
The corresponding counter and only one of them (INSTDIPCNT, MOMDIPCNT
or TEMPDIPCNT) is increased by one. If the dip limit undershooting duration is
shorter than VVa dip time 1, VVa swell time 1 or VVa Int time 1, the event is not
detected at all, and if the duration is longer than VVa Dur Max,
MAXDURDIPCNT is increased by one but no event detection resulting in the
activation of the OPERATE output and recording data update takes place. These
counters are available through the monitored data view on the LHMI or through
tools via communications. There are no phase-segregated counters but all the
variation detections are registered to a common time/magnitude-classified counter
type. Consequently, a simultaneous multiphase event, that is, the variation-type
event detection time moment is exactly the same for two or more phases, is
counted only once also for single-phase power systems.
Voltage
xUref
1.00
0
VVa dip time 1 VVa dip time 2 VVa dip time 3 VVa Dur Max Time (ms)
0
GUID-0D3F6D81-F905-4D8D-A579-836EF7BB6773 V1 EN
In Figure 285, the corresponding limits regarding the swell operation are provided
with the inherent magnitude limit order difference. The swell functionality
principle is the same as for dips, but the different limits for the signal magnitude
and times and the inherent operating zone change (here, Voltage swell set x > 1.0
xUn) are applied.
Voltage
xUref
1.40
Instantaneous
swell Momentary
swell Temporary Maximum duration
Voltage swell set 1 swell swell
For interruption, as shown in Figure 286, there is only one magnitude limit but four
duration limits for interruption classification. Now the event and counter type
depends only on variation duration time.
Voltage
xUref
1.00
0
VVa Int time 1 VVa Int time 2 VVa Int time 3 VVa Dur Max Time (ms)
0
GUID-AA022CA2-4CBF-49A1-B710-AB602F8C8343 V1 EN
The event indication ends and possible detection is done when the TRMS voltage
returns above (for dip and interruption) or below (for swell) the activation-starting
limit. For example, after an instantaneous dip, the event indication when the
voltage magnitude exceeds Voltage dip set 1 is not detected (and recorded)
immediately but only if no longer dip indication for the same dip variation takes
place and maximum duration time for dip variation does not exceed before the
signal magnitude rises above Voltage dip set 3. There is a small hysteresis for all
these limits to avoid the oscillation of the output activation. No drop-off approach
is applied here due to the hysteresis.
Consequently, only one event detection and recording of the same variation type
can take place for one voltage variation, so the longest indicated variation of each
variation type is detected. Furthermore, it is possible that another instantaneous dip
event replaces the one already indicated if the magnitude again undershoots
Voltage dip set 1 for the set time after the first detection and the signal magnitude
or time requirement is again fulfilled. Another possibility is that if the time
condition is not fulfilled for an instantaneous dip detection but the signal rises
above Voltage dip set 1, the already elapsed time is included in the momentary dip
timer. Especially the interruption time is included in the dip time. If the signal does
not exceed Voltage dip set 2 before the timer VVa dip time 2 has elapsed when the
momentary dip timer is also started after the magnitude undershooting Voltage dip
set 2, the momentary dip event instead is detected. Consequently, the same dip
occurrence with a changing variation depth can result in several dip event
indications but only one detection. For example, if the magnitude has undershot
Voltage dip set 1 but remained above Voltage Intr set for a shorter time than the
value of VVa dip time 1 but the signal rises between Voltage dip set 1 and Voltage
dip set 2 so that the total duration of the dip activation is longer than VVa dip time
2 and the maximum time is not overshot, this is detected as a momentary dip even
though a short instantaneous dip period has been included. In text, the terms
"deeper" and "higher" are used for referring to dip or interruption.
Although examples are given for dip events, the same rules can be applied to the
swell and interruption functionality too. For swell indication, "deeper" means that
the signal rises even more and "higher" means that the signal magnitude becomes
lower respectively.
The duration of each voltage phase corresponds to the period during which the
measured TRMS values remain above (swell) or below (dip, interruption) the
corresponding limit.
Besides the three limit settings for the variation types dip and swell, there is also a
specific duration setting for each limit setting. For interruption, there is only one
limit setting common for the three duration settings. The maximum duration setting
is common for all variation types.
The duration measurement module measures the voltage variation duration of each
phase voltage separately when the Phase mode setting is "Single Phase". The phase
variation durations are independent. However, when the Phase mode setting is
"Three Phase", voltage variation may start only when all the monitored phases are
active. An example of variation duration when Phase mode is "Single Phase" can
be seen in Figure 287. The voltage variation in the example is detected as an
interruption for the phase B and a dip for the phase A, and also the variation
durations are interpreted as independent U_B and U_A durations. In case of single-
phase interruption, the DIPST output is active when either ST_A or ST_B is
active. The measured variation durations are the times measured between the
activation of the ST_A or ST_B outputs and deactivation of the ST_A or ST_B
outputs. When the Phase mode setting is "Three Phase", the example case does not
result in any activation.
GUID-22014C0F-9FE2-4528-80BA-AEE2CD9813B8 V1 EN
Figure 287: Single-phase interruption for the Phase mode value "Single Phase"
The provided rules always apply for single-phase (Phase Mode is "Single Phase")
power systems. However, for three-phase power systems (where Phase Mode is
"Three Phase"), it is required that all the phases have to be activated before the
activation of the START output. Interruption event indication requires all three
phases to undershoot Voltage Int set simultaneously, as shown in Figure 283. When
the requirement for interruption for "Three Phase" is no longer fulfilled, variation
is indicated as a dip as long as all phases are active.
It is also possible that there are simultaneously a dip in one phase and a swell in
other phases. The functionality of the corresponding event indication with one
inactive phase is shown in Figure 288. Here, the "Swell + dip" variation type of
Phase mode is "Single Phase". For the selection "Three Phase" of Phase mode, no
event indication or any activation takes place due to a non-active phase.
U_A
Voltage swell set
U_C
U_B
Voltage dip set
VoltageInt set
TRUE
ST_A FALSE
TRUE
ST_B FALSE
TRUE
ST_C FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
GUID-0657A163-7D42-4543-8EC8-3DF84E2F0BF5 V1 EN
Figure 288: Concurrent dip and swell when Phase mode is "Single Phase"
In Figure 289, one phase is in dip and two phases have a swell indication. For the
Phase Mode value "Three Phase", the activation occurs only when all the phases
are active. Furthermore, both swell and dip variation event detections take place
simultaneously. In case of a concurrent voltage dip and voltage swell, both
SWELLCNT and DIPCNT are incremented by one.
Also Figure 289 shows that for the Phase Mode value "Three Phase", two different
time moment variation event swell detections take place and, consequently,
DIPCNT is incremented by one but SWELLCNT is totally incremented by two.
Both in Figure 288 and Figure 289 it is assumed that variation durations are
sufficient for detections to take place.
U_A
Voltage swell set
U_C
U_B
Voltage dip set
TRUE
ST_A FALSE
TRUE
ST_B FALSE
TRUE
ST_C FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
A) Three phase mode
TRUE
ST_A FALSE
TRUE
ST_B FALSE
TRUE
ST_C FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
B) Single phase mode
GUID-1C0C906B-EC91-4C59-9291-B5002830E590 V1 EN
The data objects to be recorded for PHQVVR are given in Table 477. There are
totally three data banks, and the information given in the table refers to one data
bank content.
The three sets of recorded data available are saved in data banks 1-3. The data bank
1 holds always the most recent recorded data, and the older data sets are moved to
the next banks (1→2 and 2→3) when a valid voltage variation is detected. When
all three banks have data and a new variation is detected, the newest data are placed
into bank 1 and the data in bank 3 are overwritten by the data from bank 2.
Figure 290 shows a valid recorded voltage interruption and two dips for the Phase
mode value "Single Phase". The first dip event duration is based on the U_A
duration, while the second dip is based on the time difference between the dip stop
and start times. The first detected event is an interruption based on the U_B
duration given in Figure 290. It is shown also with dotted arrows how voltage time
stamps are taken before the final time stamp for recording, which is shown as a
solid arrow. Here, the U_B timestamp is not taken when the U_A activation starts.
U_A
U_A duration
U_B
Voltage dip set
Dip start
Dip stop
U_B duration
10.3.6 Application
Voltage variations are the most typical power quality variations on the public
electric network. Typically, short-duration voltage variations are defined to last
more than half of the nominal frequency period and less than one minute
(European Standard EN 50160 and IEEE Std 1159-1995).
max duration
swell
min duration
duration
dip
GUID-EF7957CE-E6EF-483E-A879-ABD003AC1AF9 V1 EN
Figure 291: Duration and voltage magnitude limits for swell, dip and
interruption measurement
Voltage dips disturb the sensitive equipment such as computers connected to the
power system and may result in the failure of the equipment. Voltage dips are
typically caused by faults occurring in the power distribution system. Typical
reasons for the faults are lightning strikes and tree contacts. In addition to fault
situations, the switching of heavy loads and starting of large motors also cause dips.
Voltage swells cause extra stress for the network components and the devices
connected to the power system. Voltage swells are typically caused by the earth
faults that occur in the power distribution system.
Voltage interruptions are typically associated with the switchgear operation related
to the occurrence and termination of short circuits. The operation of a circuit
breaker disconnects a part of the system from the source of energy. In the case of
overhead networks, automatic reclosing sequences are often applied to the circuit
breakers that interrupt fault currents. All these actions result in a sudden reduction
of voltages on all voltage phases.
Due to the nature of voltage variations, the power quality standards do not specify
any acceptance limits. There are only indicative values for, for example, voltage
dips in the European standard EN 50160. However, the power quality standards
like the international standard IEC 61000-4-30 specify that the voltage variation
event is characterized by its duration and magnitude. Furthermore, IEEE Std
1159-1995 gives the recommended practice for monitoring the electric power quality.
10.3.7 Signals
Table 479: PHQVVR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current magnitude
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current magnitude
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current magnitude
U_A SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage A
U_B SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage B
U_C SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
10.3.8 Settings
Table 481: PHQVVR Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reference voltage 10.0...200.0 %Un 0.1 57.7 Reference supply voltage in %
Voltage dip set 1 10.0...100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Dip limit 1 in % of reference voltage
VVa dip time 1 0.5...54.0 cycles 0.1 3.0 Voltage variation dip duration 1
Voltage dip set 2 10.0...100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Dip limit 2 in % of reference voltage
VVa dip time 2 10.0...180.0 cycles 0.1 30.0 Voltage variation dip duration 2
Voltage dip set 3 10.0...100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Dip limit 3 in % of reference voltage
VVa dip time 3 2000...60000 ms 10 3000 Voltage variation dip duration 3
Voltage swell set 1 100.0...140.0 % 0.1 120.0 Swell limit 1 in % of reference voltage
VVa swell time 1 0.5...54.0 cycles 0.1 0.5 Voltage variation swell duration 1
Voltage swell set 2 100.0...140.0 % 0.1 120.0 Swell limit 2 in % of reference voltage
VVa swell time 2 10.0...80.0 cycles 0.1 10.0 Voltage variation swell duration 2
Voltage swell set 3 100.0...140.0 % 0.1 120.0 Swell limit 3 in % of reference voltage
VVa swell time 3 2000...60000 ms 10 2000 Voltage variation swell duration 3
Voltage Int set 0.0...100.0 % 0.1 10.0 Interruption limit in % of reference voltage
VVa Int time 1 0.5...30.0 cycles 0.1 3.0 Voltage variation Int duration 1
VVa Int time 2 10.0...180.0 cycles 0.1 30.0 Voltage variation Int duration 2
VVa Int time 3 2000...60000 ms 10 3000 Voltage variation interruption duration 3
VVa Dur Max 100...3600000 ms 100 60000 Maximum voltage variation duration
10.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage unbalance power quality VSQVUB VSQVUB PQMUBV
GUID-568233FA-CCCC-4D0F-998A-52F9F12AC0F9 V2 EN
10.4.3 Functionality
The voltage unbalance power quality function VSQVUB monitors voltage
unbalance conditions in power transmission and distribution networks. It can be
applied to identify a network and load unbalance that can cause sustained voltage
unbalance. VSQVUB is also used to monitor the commitment of the power supply
utility of providing a high-quality, that is, a balanced voltage supply on a
continuous basis.
VSQVUB uses five different methods for calculating voltage unbalance. The
methods are the negative-sequence voltage magnitude, zero-sequence voltage
magnitude, ratio of the negative-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-
sequence voltage magnitude, ratio of the zero-sequence voltage magnitude to the
positive-sequence voltage magnitude or ratio of maximum phase voltage
magnitude deviation from the mean voltage magnitude to the mean of the phase
voltage magnitude.
VSQVUB provides statistics which can be used to verify the compliance of the
power quality with the European standard EN 50160 (2000). The statistics over
selected period include freely selectable percentile for unbalance. VSQVUB also
includes an alarm functionality providing a maximum unbalance value and the date
and time of occurrence.
The operation of the voltage unbalance power quality function can be described
with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.
U1
U2 Voltage AL_MN_IMB
U0 unbalance
U3P U_RMS_A Average calculation detector
U_RMS_B
U_RMS_C
BLOCK
BLK_ALARM
AL_PCT_IMB
Percentile
calculation
OBS_PR_ACT
RESET
GUID-6D371A54-607F-4073-A604-F8C86B1EDB43 V1 EN
Average calculation
VSQVUB calculates two sets of measured voltage unbalance values, a three-
second and a ten-minute non-sliding average value. The three-second average
value is used for continuous monitoring. The ten-minute average is used for
percentile calculation for a longer period
The Average calculation module uses five different methods for the average
calculation. The required method can be selected with the Unb detection method
parameter.
When the "Neg Seq" mode is selected with Unb detection method, the voltage
unbalance is calculated based on the negative-sequence voltage magnitude.
Similarly, when the "Zero Seq" mode is selected, the voltage unbalance is
calculated based on the zero-sequence voltage magnitude. When the "Neg to Pos
Seq" mode is selected, the voltage unbalance is calculated based on the ratio of the
negative-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-sequence magnitude. When
the "Zero to Pos Seq" mode is selected, the voltage unbalance is calculated based
on the ratio of the zero-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-sequence
magnitude. When the "Ph vectors Comp" mode is selected, the ratio of the
maximum phase voltage magnitude deviation from the mean voltage magnitude to
the mean of the phase voltage magnitude is used for voltage unbalance calculation.
The calculated three-second value and ten-minute value are available in the
monitored data view through the outputs 3S_MN_UNB and 10MN_MN_UNB.
Percentile calculation
The Percentile calculation module performs the statistics calculation for the level
of voltage unbalance value for a settable duration. The operation of the Percentile
calculation module can be described with a module diagram.
Observation
OBS_PR_ACT
period
3s_MN_UNB
(from Average calculator)
Statistics Percentile
PCT_UNB_AL
10MIN_MN_UNB recorder calculator
(from Average calculator)
BLOCK
GUID-0190AF77-2DCC-4015-8142-EA6FE5FA2228 V2 EN
Observation period
The Observation period module calculates the length of the observation time for
the Statistics recorder sub-module as well as determines the possible start of a new
one. A new period can be started by timed activation using calendar time settings
Obs period Str year, Obs period Str month, Obs period Str day and Obs period Str
hour.
The observation period start time settings Obs period Str year, Obs
period Str month, Obs period Str day and Obs period Str hour are
used to set the calendar time in UTC. These settings have to be
adjusted according to the local time and local daylight saving time.
In the single triggering mode, only one period of observation time is activated. In
the periodic triggering mode, the time gap between the two trigger signals is seven
days. In the continuous triggering mode, the next period starts right after the
previous observation period is completed.
The length of the period is determined by the settings Obs period selection and
User Def Obs period. The OBS_PR_ACT output is an indication signal which
exhibits rising edge (TRUE) when the observation period starts and falling edge
(FALSE) when the observation period ends.
If the Percentile unbalance, Trigger mode or Obs period duration settings change
when OBS_PR_ACT is active, OBS_PR_ACT deactivates immediately.
OBS_PR_ACT
Trigger mode - Single
Obs period selection – 4 (7 days)
TIme
7 days
TIme
TIme
TIme
GUID-A70EC355-E810-4A4A-8368-97B7AEF9F65B V1 EN
Figure 295: Periods for statistics recorder with different trigger modes and
period settings
The BLOCK input blocks the OBS_PR_ACT output, which then disables the
maximum value calculation of the Statistics recorder module. If the trigger mode is
selected "Periodic" or "Continuous" and the blocking is deactivated before the next
observation period is due to start, the scheduled period starts normally.
Statistics recorder
The Statistics recorder module provides readily calculated three-second or ten-
minute values of the selected phase to the percentile calculator module based on
the length of the active observation period. If the observation period is less than
one day, the three-second average values are used. If the observation period is one
day or longer, the ten-minute average values are used.
Percentile calculator
The purpose of the Percentile calculator module is to find the voltage unbalance
level so that during the observation time 95 percent (default value of the Percentile
unbalance setting) of all the measured voltage unbalance amplitudes are less than
or equal to the calculated percentile.
The computed output value PCT_UNB_VAL, below which the percentile of the
values lies, is available in the monitored data view. The PCT_UNB_VAL output
value is updated at the end of the observation period.
If the output PCT_UNB_VAL is higher than the defined setting Unbalance start val
at the end of the observation period, an alarm output PCT_UNB_AL is activated.
The PCT_UNB_AL output remains active for the whole period before the next
period completes.
Recorded data
The information required for a later fault analysis is stored when the Recorded data
module is triggered. This happens when a voltage unbalance is detected by the
Voltage unbalance detector module.
Three sets of recorded data are available in total. The sets are saved in data banks
1-3. The data bank 1 holds the most recent recorded data. Older data are moved to
the subsequent banks (1→2 and 2→3) when a voltage unbalance is detected. When
all three banks have data and a new variation is detected, the latest data set is
placed into bank 1 and the data in bank 3 is overwritten by the data from bank 2.
The recorded data can be reset with the RESET binary input signal by navigating to
the HMI reset (Main menu / Clear / Reset recorded data / VSQVUBx) or
through tools via communications.
When a voltage unbalance is detected in the system, VSQVUB responds with the
MN_UNB_AL alarm signal. During the alarm situation, VSQVUB stores the
maximum magnitude and the time of occurrence and the duration of alarm
MN_UNB_AL. The recorded data is stored when MN_UNB_AL is deactivated.
10.4.5 Application
A balanced supply, balanced network and balanced load lead to a better power
quality. When one of these conditions is disturbed, the power quality is
deteriorated. VSQVUB monitors such voltage unbalance conditions in power
transmission and distribution networks. VSQVUB calculates two sets of measured
values, a three-second and a ten-minute non-sliding average value. The three-
second average value is used for continuous monitoring while the ten-minute
average value is used for percentile calculation for a longer period of time. It can
be applied to identify the network and load unbalance that may cause sustained
voltage unbalance. A single-phase or phase-to-phase fault in the network or load
side can create voltage unbalance but, as faults are usually isolated in a short period
of time, the voltage unbalance is not a sustained one. Therefore, the voltage
unbalance may not be covered by VSQVUB.
Another major application is the long-term power quality monitoring. This can be
used to confirm a compliance to the standard power supply quality norms. The
function provides a voltage unbalance level which corresponds to the 95th
percentile of the ten minutes' average values of voltage unbalance recorded over a
period of up to one week. It means that for 95 percent of time during the
observation period the voltage unbalance was less than or equal to the calculated
percentile. An alarm can be obtained if this value exceeds the value that can be set.
The function uses five different methods for calculating voltage unbalance.
• Negative-sequence voltage magnitude
• Zero-sequence voltage magnitude
• Ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence voltage magnitude
• Ratio of zero-sequence to positive-sequence voltage magnitude
• Ratio of maximum phase voltage magnitude deviation from the mean voltage
magnitude to the mean of phase voltage magnitude.
10.4.6 Signals
Table 486: VSQVUB Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A voltage
U_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B voltage
U_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C voltage
U1 SIGNAL 0
U2 SIGNAL 0
U0 SIGNAL 0
10.4.7 Settings
Table 488: VSQVUB Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation On/Off
5=off
Unb detection method 1=Neg Seq 3=Neg to Pos Seq Set the operation mode for voltage
2=Zero Seq unbalance calculation
3=Neg to Pos Seq
4=Zero to Pos Seq
5=Ph vectors Comp
Unbalance start Val 1...100 % 1 1 Voltage unbalance start value
Trigger mode 1=Single 3=Continuous Specifies the observation period
2=Periodic triggering mode
3=Continuous
Percentile unbalance 1...100 % 1 95 The percent to which percentile value
PCT_UNB_VAL is calculated
Obs period selection 1=1 Hour 5=User defined Observation period for unbalance
2=12 Hours calculation
3=1 Day
4=7 Days
5=User defined
User Def Obs period 1...168 h 1 168 User define observation period for
statistic calculation
Obs period Str time 2008010100...2076 1 2011010101 Calendar time for observation period
010100 start given as YYYYMMDDhh
The user can determine the reset in the DT mode with the Reset delay time setting,
which provides the delayed reset property when needed.
The Type of reset curve setting has no effect on the reset method
when the DT mode is selected, but the reset is determined solely
with the Reset delay time setting.
The purpose of the delayed reset is to enable fast clearance of intermittent faults,
for example self-sealing insulation faults, and severe faults which may produce
high asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers. It
is typical for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop-off
periods, during which the fault current falls below the set start current, including
hysteresis. Without the delayed reset function, the operate timer would reset when
the current drops off. In the same way, an apparent drop-off period of the
secondary current of the saturated current transformer can also reset the operate timer.
A060764 V1 EN
In case 1, the reset is delayed with the Reset delay time setting and in case 2, the
counter is reset immediately, because the Reset delay time setting is set to zero.
A070421 V1 EN
Figure 297: Drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time
When the drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time, as described in
Figure 297, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active,
provided that the current is above the set Start value. The input signal is inactive
when the current is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region. The
timer input rises when a fault current is detected. The definite timer activates the
START output and the operate timer starts elapsing. The reset (drop-off) timer
starts when the timer input falls, that is, the fault disappears. When the reset (drop-
off) timer elapses, the operate timer is reset. Since this happens before another start
occurs, the OPERATE output is not activated.
A070420 V1 EN
Figure 298: Drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time
When the drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time, as described in
Figure 298, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active,
provided that the current is above the set Start value. The input signal is inactive
when the current is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region. The
timer input rises when a fault current is detected. The definite timer activates the
START output and the operate timer starts elapsing. The Reset (drop-off) timer
starts when the timer input falls, that is, the fault disappears. Another fault situation
occurs before the reset (drop-off) timer has elapsed. This causes the activation of
the OPERATE output, since the operate timer already has elapsed.
A070422 V1 EN
Figure 299: Operating effect of the BLOCK input when the selected blocking
mode is "Freeze timer"
If the BLOCK input is activated when the operate timer is running, as described in
Figure 299, the timer is frozen during the time BLOCK remains active. If the timer
input is not active longer than specified by the Reset delay time setting, the operate
timer is reset in the same way as described in Figure 297, regardless of the BLOCK
input .
The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of
the integrator calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the
inverse-time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the
setting values used. The curve scaling is determined with the Time multiplier setting.
GUID-20353F8B-2112-41CB-8F68-B51F8ACA775E V1 EN
Figure 300: Operation time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out
with the Minimum operate time setting is set to 1000 milliseconds
(the IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum).
GUID-87A96860-4268-4AD1-ABA1-3227D3BB36D5 V1 EN
Figure 301: Operation time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out
with IDMT Sat point setting value “11” (the Minimum operate time
setting is set to minimum).
GUID-9BFD6DC5-08B5-4755-A899-DF5ED26E75F6 V1 EN
Figure 302: Example of how the inverse time characteristic is leveled out with
currents over 50 x In and the Setting Start value setting “2.5 x In”.
(the IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum and the Minimum
operate time setting is set to minimum).
The grey zone in Figure 302 shows the behavior of the curve in case the measured
current is outside the guaranteed measuring range. Also, the maximum measured
current of 50 x In gives the leveling-out point 50/2.5 = 20 x I/I>.
The operate times for the ANSI and IEC IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B and C.
A
t[ s ] = + B⋅k
c
I
I > − 1
A060821 V2 EN (Equation 55)
Table 491: Curve parameters for ANSI and IEC IDMT curves
Curve name A B C
(1) ANSI Extremely 28.2 0.1217 2.0
Inverse
(2) ANSI Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0
(3) ANSI Normal 0.0086 0.0185 0.02
Inverse
(4) ANSI Moderately 0.0515 0.1140 0.02
Inverse
(6) Long Time 64.07 0.250 2.0
Extremely Inverse
(7) Long Time Very 28.55 0.712 2.0
Inverse
(8) Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.185 0.02
(9) IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.0 0.02
(10) IEC Very Inverse 13.5 0.0 1.0
(11) IEC Inverse 0.14 0.0 0.02
(12) IEC Extremely 80.0 0.0 2.0
Inverse
(13) IEC Short Time 0.05 0.0 0.04
Inverse
(14) IEC Long Time 120 0.0 1.0
Inverse
A070750 V2 EN
A070751 V2 EN
A070752 V2 EN
A070753 V2 EN
A070817 V2 EN
A070818 V2 EN
A070819 V2 EN
A070820 V2 EN
A070821 V2 EN
A070822 V2 EN
A070823 V2 EN
A070824 V2 EN
A070825 V2 EN
The user can define curves by entering parameters into the following standard
formula:
k
t[ s ] =
0.339 − 0.236 × I >
I
A060642 V2 EN (Equation 57)
I
t[ s ] = 5.8 − 1.35 × In
k×I >
A060643 V2 EN (Equation 58)
A070826 V2 EN
A070827 V2 EN
The trip times for the curves are defined with the coefficients A, B, and C.
A
t [s ] = + B×k
I C
−D
I >
GUID-FB7927F0-4BAD-4875-9577-E7BABB73500B V1 EN (Equation 59)
Curve name A B C D
Recloser B (117) 4.22886 0.008933 1.7822 0.319885
Recloser C (133) 8.76047 0.029977 1.80788 0.380004
Recloser D (116) 5.23168 0.000462 2.17125 0.17205
Recloser E (132) 10.7656 0.004284 2.18261 0.249969
Recloser F (163) Point to point data
Recloser G (121) Point to point data
Recloser H (122) Point to point data
Recloser J (164) Point to point data
Recloser K- Point to point data
Ground (165)
Recloser K- 11.9847 -0.000324 2.01174 0.688477
Phase (162)
Recloser L (107) Point to point data
Recloser M (118) Point to point data
Recloser N (104) 0.285625 -0.71079 0.911551 0.464202
Recloser P (115) Point to point data
Recloser P (115) Point to point data
Recloser R (105) 0.001015 -0.13381 0.00227 0.998848
Recloser T (161) Point to point data
Recloser V (137) Point to point data
Recloser W (138) 15.4628 0.056438 1.6209 0.345703
Recloser Y (120) Point to point data
Recloser Z (134) Point to point data
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07 k
4.0
0.06
0.05
0.04
2.0
0.03
1.6
0.02 1.3
0.2 0.4 0.7 1.0
0.3 0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-51DC4F80-E4B4-473A-9A89-7D928673C26F V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
k
2 4.0
1 2.0
Time (s)
0.9
0.8 1.6
0.7
1.3
0.6
0.5 1.0
0.4
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.2 0.4
0.3
0.1 0.2
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05 0.1
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-210C7341-28A2-4644-9C73-B15C069BAB56 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
k
4 4.0
2 2.0
1.6
1.3
1 1.0
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-B70B619E-E768-4ED1-8DB8-897698C7DAE2 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05 k
4.0
0.04
0.03
2.0
0.02 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.6
0.3 0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-0D84A6F0-95D5-4544-9BFE-1FBECAF5981F V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06 k
0.05 4.0
0.04
0.03
2.0
0.02 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.6
0.3 0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-F8670530-EB7D-4BAC-926C-B6562123D1A9 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07 k
0.06 4.0
0.05
0.04
0.03 2.0
1.6
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3
0.3 0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-6787C919-14E2-4052-AA7E-E58D534F85C3 V1 EN
70 k
60
2.0
50
1.6
40
1.3
30
1.0
20 0.7
0.5
0.4
10
9
8 0.3
7
6
0.2
5
4
3
0.1
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-2F62E750-9CAF-4042-8787-401D6CD1FB84 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8 k
0.7
4.0
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3 2.0
1.6
0.2 1.3
1.0
0.7
0.1
0.09
0.08 0.5
0.07
0.06 0.4
0.05 0.3
0.04
0.2
0.03
0.02 0.1
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-FD7C2994-D69F-4B7B-ABEB-6BC8CB88BBBC V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 1.3 2.0 4.0 k
1.0 1.6
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-B73E75CF-5D75-42D7-90FC-3BAAF30C8921 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.3 2.0 4.0 k
1.6
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-EBA2A47F-C7D1-4A33-93B8-7E2D0AEA4914 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
k
20 4.0
10 2.0
9
8 1.6
7 1.3
6
5 1.0
4
0.7
3
0.5
2 0.4
0.3
1 0.2
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5 0.1
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-7DF4EA7C-2F21-4A2A-A483-C88A0BB5DF08 V1 EN
70
60
50 k
4.0
40
30
2.0
20
1.6
1.3
1.0
10
9
8
7 0.7
6
0.5
5
0.4
4
0.3
3
2 0.2
0.1
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-11035542-1C96-46D3-991D-8E52BB8DDA08 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
k
4.0
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06 2.0
0.05 1.6
0.04 1.3
0.03 1.0
0.02 0.7
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-2C394C54-69A2-4663-B3CD-83809F37D9C9 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
2 k
4.0
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8 2.0
0.7 1.6
0.6
1.3
0.5
0.4 1.0
0.3 0.7
0.2 0.5
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.09
0.08 0.2
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04 0.1
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-C904F17F-A2A0-4886-90F8-DC7824FA6FAA V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
k
0.1 4.0
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05 2.0
0.04 1.6
0.03 1.3
1.0
0.02 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-135699DF-9A28-4C6B-8123-09006DC03121 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09 k
0.08 4.0
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04 2.0
0.03 1.6
1.3
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0
0.4
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-B9B73713-ADE0-4D97-AF13-6AB78CCD0C7D V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07 k
0.06 4.0
0.05
0.04
0.03
2.0
1.6
0.02
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.3
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-34E47177-25E1-42C0-ACD2-C47F0F9F96C7 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
k
2
4.0
1
Time (s)
0.9 2.0
0.8
0.7 1.6
0.6 1.3
0.5
1.0
0.4
0.7
0.3
0.5
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.09 0.2
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.1
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-755AF804-192F-446C-9308-06BE590096AA V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07 k
0.06 4.0
0.05
0.04
0.03 2.0
1.6
0.02 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3
0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-58A1E41F-0284-4153-A28A-8031B2B31084 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07 k
0.06
4.0
0.05
0.04
0.03
2.0
1.6
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.3
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-FC9432F4-CEFF-4C07-A5C2-5CEBD77FFF57 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2 k
4.0
0.1
0.09
0.08 2.0
0.07
0.06 1.6
0.05 1.3
0.04 1.0
0.03
0.7
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-7D1A64CB-BC4E-47B0-8896-A159C8A115BA V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.3 2.0 4.0 k
0.4 1.0 1.6
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-F24218A1-6383-4AE8-BAD2-8C89917EE3B6 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
k
0.03 4.0
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-08C354D7-E52D-4335-A674-EFA97755B85B V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06 k
0.05 4.0
0.04
0.03
2.0
0.02 1.6
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.3
0.4
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-93623B43-5A3C-4BD1-8C95-38B16ED2666D V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
k
1.6 20
1.3
1.0
10
9
0.7 8
7
0.5 6
0.4
5
4
0.3
3
0.2
2
0.1
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05 k
4.0
0.04
0.03
2.0
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-257052E2-11FA-4BF0-9037-D42CF5B396F2 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
0.7
6
5
0.5
4
0.4
3
0.3
2
0.2
1
Time (s)
0.9 0.1
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05 k
4.0
0.04
0.03
2.0
0.02 1.0 1.3 1.6
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-8098C20F-703D-4AFE-BDD4-AC9B24BF7D32 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
k
4.0
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
2.0
0.05
1.6
0.04
1.3
0.03
1.0
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-E604F16E-E376-43ED-BD80-4462ECE9E00D V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
k
4.0
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07 2.0
0.06 1.6
0.05 1.3
0.04
1.0
0.03
0.7
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-674BFDF2-A61A-45D8-A788-15C869A6AF21 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
k
4.0
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.3 2.0
0.4 1.0 1.6
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-70C70F08-FBC5-4D1E-B60E-59A70DD71FC5 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05 k
4.0
0.04
0.03
2.0
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.6
0.3 0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-49AEBE75-E534-4D14-B7E4-4FF99A246C24 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
k
0.07
4.0
0.06
0.05
0.04
2.0
0.03
1.6
0.02 1.3
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 1.0
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-5BE6A2CA-C5C0-45ED-9C96-B84966B58C98 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
2 k
4.0
1
Time (s)
0.9 2.0
0.8
0.7
1.6
0.6
1.3
0.5
1.0
0.4
0.3
0.7
0.5
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.09 0.2
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.1
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-AB8B24CA-A114-4771-B802-753630CE538F V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07 k
0.06 4.0
0.05
0.04
0.03
2.0
1.6
0.02
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3
0.3 0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-F8841900-7103-4F04-9C82-90792F228AA0 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-F17663B7-DDFC-4558-9E9E-35D2C5BBD059 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
k
4.0
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06 2.0
0.05 1.6
0.04 1.3
0.03 1.0
0.02 0.7
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-91768C72-BA22-4BDD-8FFA-1CA7E3F0F558 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3 k
4.0
2
2.0
1
Time (s)
1.6
0.9
0.8 1.3
0.7
0.6 1.0
0.5
0.4 0.7
0.3 0.5
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06 0.1
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-358D576A-0F8C-4979-AB51-AD26445CA9D6 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
k
0.4
4.0
0.3
0.2
2.0
1.6
1.3
0.1
0.09 1.0
0.08
0.07
0.06 0.7
0.05
0.5
0.04
0.4
0.03
0.3
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-A7DCC393-1F15-4901-82D7-A7F4343558FE V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
k
0.4 4.0
0.3
0.2 2.0
1.6
1.3
0.1 1.0
0.09
0.08
0.07 0.7
0.06
0.05 0.5
0.04 0.4
0.03 0.3
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-C40A0F65-0134-4326-A964-0D4DD01A70D1 V1 EN
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
2 k
4.0
1
Time (s)
0.9
0.8 2.0
0.7 1.6
0.6
1.3
0.5
0.4 1.0
0.3 0.7
0.2 0.5
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.09
0.08 0.2
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04 0.1
0.03
0.02
0.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50
Current (multiples of start value)
GUID-9D4092E7-0C28-4657-8EBD-D1090FA79076 V1 EN
Immediate reset
If the Type of reset curve setting in a drop-off case is selected as "Immediate", the
inverse timer resets immediately.
If the Type of reset curve setting is selected as “Def time reset”, the
current level has no influence on the reset characteristic.
Inverse reset
Inverse reset curves are available only for ANSI and user-
programmable curves. If you use other curve types, immediate reset
occurs.
D ⋅k
t[ s ] =
2
I − 1
I>
A060817 V3 EN (Equation 60)
A070828 V1 EN
A070829 V1 EN
A070830 V1 EN
A070831 V1 EN
A070832 V1 EN
A070833 V1 EN
A070834 V1 EN
The user can define the delayed inverse reset time characteristics with the
following formula using the set Curve parameter D.
D ⋅k
t[ s ] =
2
I − 1
I>
A060817 V3 EN (Equation 61)
Activating the BLOCK input alone does not affect the operation of the START
output. It still becomes active when the current exceeds the set Start value, and
inactive when the current falls below the set Start value and the set Reset delay
time has expired.
The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of
the integrator calculating the overvoltage situation exceeds the value set by the
inverse time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting
values used. The user determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier setting.
The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time for the IDMT
mode, that is, it is possible to limit the IDMT based operate time for not becoming
too short. For example:
GUID-BCFE3F56-BFA8-4BCC-8215-30C089C80EAD V1 EN
Figure 364: Operate time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum
operate time set to 0.5 second
GUID-90BAEB05-E8FB-4F8A-8F07-E110DD63FCCF V1 EN
Figure 365: Operate time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum
operate time set to 1 second
The operate times for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B, C, D and E.
k⋅A
t s = E
+D
U −U >
B× −C
U >
GUID-6E9DC0FE-7457-4317-9480-8CCC6D63AB35 V2 EN (Equation 62)
Table 495: Curve coefficients for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves
Curve name A B C D E
(17) Inverse Curve A 1 1 0 0 1
(18) Inverse Curve B 480 32 0.5 0.035 2
(19) Inverse Curve C 480 32 0.5 0.035 3
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN
The user can define the curves by entering the parameters using the standard formula:
k⋅A
t s = E
+D
U −U >
B× −C
U >
GUID-6E9DC0FE-7457-4317-9480-8CCC6D63AB35 V2 EN (Equation 63)
For the overvoltage IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time
does not start until the voltage exceeds the value of Start value. To cope with
discontinuity characteristics of the curve, a specific parameter for saturating the
equation to a fixed value is created. The Curve Sat Relative setting is the parameter
and it is given in percents compared to Start value. For example, due to the curve
equation B and C, the characteristics equation output is saturated in such a way that
when the input voltages are in the range of Start value to Curve Sat Relative in
percent over Start value, the equation uses Start value * (1.0 + Curve Sat Relative /
100 ) for the measured voltage. Although, the curve A has no discontinuities when
the ratio U/U> exceeds the unity, Curve Sat Relative is also set for it. The Curve
Sat Relative setting for curves A, B and C is 2.0 percent. However, it should be
noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve characteristics concerning the
discontinuities in the curve when the programmable curve equation is used. Thus,
the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another degree of freedom to move the
inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it effectively sets the maximum operate
time for the IDMT curve because for the voltage ratio values affecting by this
setting, the operation time is fixed, that is, the definite time, depending on the
parameters but no longer the voltage.
The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of
the integrator calculating the undervoltage situation exceeds the value set by the
inverse-time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the
setting values used. The user determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier
setting.
The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time possible for
the IDMT mode. For setting a value for this parameter, the user should carefully
study the particular IDMT curve.
The operate times for the standard undervoltage IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B, C, D and E.
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN
The user can define curves by entering parameters into the standard formula:
k⋅A
t s = E
+D
U < −U
B× −C
U <
GUID-4A433D56-D7FB-412E-B1AB-7FD43051EE79 V2 EN (Equation 65)
For the undervoltage IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time
does not start until the voltage falls below the value of Start value. To cope with
discontinuity characteristics of the curve, a specific parameter for saturating the
equation to a fixed value is created. The Curve Sat Relative setting is the parameter
and it is given in percents compared with Start value. For example, due to the
curve equation B, the characteristics equation output is saturated in such a way that
when input voltages are in the range from Start value to Curve Sat Relative in
percents under Start value, the equation uses Start value * (1.0 - Curve Sat
Relative / 100 ) for the measured voltage. Although, the curve A has no
discontinuities when the ratio U/U> exceeds the unity, Curve Sat Relative is set for
it as well. The Curve Sat Relative setting for curves A, B and C is 2.0 percent.
However, it should be noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve
characteristics concerning also discontinuities in the curve when the programmable
curve equation is used. Thus, the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another
degree of freedom to move the inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it
effectively sets the maximum operate time for the IDMT curve because for the
voltage ratio values affecting by this setting, the operation time is fixed, that is, the
definite time, depending on the parameters but no longer the voltage.
All the function blocks that use frequency quantity as their input signal share the
common features related to the frequency measurement algorithm. The frequency
estimation is done from one phase (phase-to-phase or phase voltage) or from the
positive phase sequence (PPS). The voltage groups with three-phase inputs use PPS
as the source. The frequency measurement range is 0.6 xFn to 1.5 xFn. When the
frequency exceeds these limits, it is regarded as out of range and a minimum or
maximum value is held as the measured value respectively with appropriate quality
information. The frequency estimation requires 160 ms to stabilize after a bad
quality signal. Therefore, a delay of 160 ms is added to the transition from the bad
quality. The bad quality of the signal can be due to restrictions like:
• The source voltage is below 0.02 x Un at Fn.
• The source voltage waveform is discontinuous.
• The source voltage frequency rate of change exceeds 15 Hz/s (including
stepwise frequency changes).
When the bad signal quality is obtained, the nominal frequency value is shown
with appropriate quality information in the measurement view. The frequency
protection functions are blocked when the quality is bad, thus the timers and the
function outputs are reset. When the frequency is out of the function block’s setting
range but within the measurement range, the protection blocks are running.
However, the OPERATE outputs are blocked until the frequency restores to a valid
range.
In many current or voltage dependent function blocks, there are four alternative
measuring principles:
• RMS
• DFT which is a numerically calculated fundamental component of the signal
• Peak-to-peak
• Peak-to-peak with peak backup
In extreme cases, for example with high overcurrent or harmonic content, the
measurement modes function in a slightly different way. The operation accuracy is
defined with the frequency range of f/fn=0.95...1.05. In peak-to-peak and RMS
measurement modes, the harmonics of the phase currents are not suppressed,
whereas in the fundamental frequency measurement the suppression of harmonics
is at least -50 dB at the frequency range of f= n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
RMS
The RMS measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting
using the value "RMS". RMS consists of both AC and DC components. The AC
component is the effective mean value of the positive and negative peak values.
RMS is used in applications where the effect of the DC component must be taken
into account.
1 n 2
I RMS = ∑ Ii
n i =1
A070883 V3 EN (Equation 66)
DFT
The DFT measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting
using the value "DFT". In the DFT mode, the fundamental frequency component of
the measured signal is numerically calculated from the samples. In some
applications, for example, it can be difficult to accomplish sufficiently sensitive
settings and accurate operation of the low stage, which may be due to a
considerable amount of harmonics on the primary side currents. In such a case, the
operation can be based solely on the fundamental frequency component of the
current. In addition, the DFT mode has slightly higher CT requirements than the peak-
to-peak mode, if used with high and instantaneous stages.
Peak-to-peak
The peak-to-peak measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode
setting using the value "Peak-to-Peak". It is the fastest measurement mode, in
which the measurement quantity is made by calculating the average from the
positive and negative peak values. The DC component is not included. The
retardation time is short. The damping of the harmonics is quite low and practically
determined by the characteristics of the anti-aliasing filter of the IED inputs.
Consequently, this mode is usually used in conjunction with high and instantaneous
stages, where the suppression of harmonics is not so important. In addition, the peak-
to-peak mode allows considerable CT saturation without impairing the
performance of the operation.
Io = −( I A + I B + I C )
GUID-B9280304-8AC0-40A5-8140-2F00C1F36A9E V1 EN (Equation 67)
The residual voltage is calculated from the phase-to-earth voltages when the VT
connection is selected as “Wye” with the equation:
Uo = (U A + U B + U C ) / 3
GUID-03909E83-8AA3-42FF-B088-F216BBB16839 V1 EN (Equation 68)
Sequence components
The phase-sequence current components are calculated from the phase currents
according to:
I 0 = (I A + I B + I C ) / 3
GUID-2319C34C-8CC3-400C-8409-7E68ACA4F435 V2 EN (Equation 69)
I1 = (I A + a ⋅ I B + a2 ⋅ I C ) / 3
GUID-02E717A9-A58F-41B3-8813-EB8CDB78CBF1 V2 EN (Equation 70)
I 2 = (I A + a2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C ) / 3
GUID-80F92D60-0425-4F1F-9B18-DB2DEF4C2407 V2 EN (Equation 71)
U 0 = (U A + U B + U C ) / 3
GUID-49CFB460-5B74-43A6-A72C-AAD3AF795716 V2 EN (Equation 72)
U 1 = (U A + a ⋅U B + a 2 ⋅ U C ) / 3
GUID-7A6B6AAD-8DDC-4663-A72F-A3715BF3E56A V2 EN (Equation 73)
U 2 = (U A + a 2 ⋅U B + a ⋅ U C ) / 3
GUID-6FAAFCC1-AF25-4A0A-8D9B-FC2FD0BCFB21 V1 EN (Equation 74)
U 1 = (U AB − a 2 ⋅ U BC ) / 3
GUID-70796339-C68A-4D4B-8C10-A966BD7F090C V2 EN (Equation 75)
U 2 = (U AB − a ⋅U BC ) / 3
GUID-C132C6CA-B5F9-4DC1-94AF-FF22D2F0F12A V2 EN (Equation 76)
The phase-to-earth voltages are calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages when
VT connection is selected as "Delta" according to the equations.
U A = U 0 + U AB − U CA / 3
( )
GUID-8581E9AC-389C-40C2-8952-3C076E74BDEC V1 EN (Equation 77)
U B = U 0 + U BC − U AB / 3
( )
GUID-9EB6302C-2DB8-482F-AAC3-BB3857C6F100 V1 EN (Equation 78)
U C = U 0 + U CA − U BC / 3
( )
GUID-67B3ACF2-D8F5-4829-B97C-7E2F3158BF8E V1 EN (Equation 79)
The phase-to-phase voltages are calculated from the phase-to-earth voltages when
VT connection is selected as "Wye" according to the equations.
U AB = U A − U B
GUID-674F05D1-414A-4F76-B196-88441B7820B8 V1 EN (Equation 80)
U BC = U B − U C
GUID-9BA93C77-427D-4044-BD68-FEE4A3A2433E V1 EN (Equation 81)
U CA = U C − U A
GUID-DDD0C1F0-6934-4FB4-9F79-702440125979 V1 EN (Equation 82)
The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on the
network fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CT
burden. The protection settings of the IED should be defined in accordance with
the CT performance as well as other factors.
The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primary
current to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer
of type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For
protective current transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest
permissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current
prescribed for the accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning
protection).
Table 497: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers
Accuracy class Current error at Phase displacement at rated primary Composite error at
rated primary current rated accuracy limit
current (%) minutes centiradians primary current (%)
5P ±1 ±60 ±1.8 5
10P ±3 - - 10
The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrent
protection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if
there are accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering,
power metering, and so on) of the IED.
The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current
magnitude at which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the
secondary current of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the
performance of the protection IED.
In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy
limit factor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the
actual CT burden.
Sin + Sn
Fa ≈ Fn ×
Sin + S
A071141 V1 EN
The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal
and dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the IED is not exceeded.
This is always fulfilled when
The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of the
IED. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominal primary current
can be used than given by the formula.
The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection IED inaccuracy, current
transformer errors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.
The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the
high set stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused by
the CT saturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is
noticeably lower than Fa.
When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT
does not need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simply
according to the formula.
With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that
is as long as the time the constant of the DC component of the fault current, when
the current is only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on the
accuracy limit factor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and
on the operate time setting.
With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as
being as long as the time constant of the DC component.
With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, the
AC component of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times the
starting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged.
Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:
The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the IED.
The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection is
implemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.
A071142 V1 EN
The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase
short circuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is
calculated to be 59.
The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice the
nominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective with
the next IED (not visible in the figure above). The settings for the high-set stage
and instantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the
downstream protection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined so
that the IED operates with the minimum fault current and it does not operate with
the maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in the figure above.
For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (I>>>)
in this example is 3 500 A (5.83 x I2n). For the CT characteristics point of view, the
criteria given by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the
IED setting is considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burden
could have been selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
A070772 V1 EN
Figure 372: The protective earth screw is located between connectors X100
and X110
The earth lead must be at least 6.0 mm2 and as short as possible.
The front communication connection is an RJ-45 type connector used mainly for
configuration and setting.
The events and setting values and all input data such as memorized values and
disturbance records can be read via the front communication port.
Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.
• PCM600
• LHMI
• WHMI
The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover
cable is used with the front port.
Communication modules including Ethernet connectors X1, X2, and X3 can utilize
the third port for connecting any other device (for example, an SNTP server, that is
visible for the whole local subnet) to a station bus.
The IED's default IP address through rear Ethernet port is 192.168.2.10 with the TCP/
IP protocol. The data transfer rate is 100 Mbps.
X 11
X19
X20
X21
X6
X5
X9
X7
X8
1 2 3
X 26
3 2 1
X 28
X27
3 2 1
GUID-D4044F6B-2DA8-4C14-A491-4772BA108292 V1 EN
GUID-41B9CEDA-BDC9-4775-8DEC-36C7DA5F73AA V1 EN
GUID-0E017119-D7B9-434C-971D-C218B73A7837 V1 EN
X 19
X 11
X 20
X 21
X6
X8
X5
X9
X7
1 2 3
X 26
3 2 1
X 17
X 18
X 16
1 2 3
1 2 3
X 13
X 15
X 14
X 27
X 28
1 2 3
3 2 1
2
4
6
X3
X 25 X 24
5
3
1
GUID-D4044F6B-2DA8-4C14-A491-4772BA108292 V1 EN
X21
X20
X19
X11
X5
X7
X9
X6
X8
1 2 3
X26
3 2 1
X13
X15
X18
X17
X14
X16
1 2 3
1 2 3
X27
X28
1 2 3
3 2 1
X3
X24
GUID-1E542C3A-F6E9-4F94-BEFD-EA3FEEC65FC8 V1 EN
COM1 port connection type can be either EIA-232 or EIA-485. The type is
selected by setting jumpers X19, X20, X21 and X26. The jumpers are set to
EIA-232 by default.
To ensure fail-safe operation, the bus is to be biased at one end using the pull-up
and pull-down resistors on the communication module. In the 4-wire connection,
the pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X5, X6, X8, X9
to enabled position. The bus termination is selected by setting jumpers X7, X11 to
enabled position.
1) Default setting
1) Default setting
COM2 port connection can be either EIA-485 or optical ST. Connection type is
selected by setting jumpers X27 and X28.
3 3
X15 2 2 X24
1 1
GUID-CA481BBF-C1C9-451D-BC18-19EC49B8A3A3 V1 EN
Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max. 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 Hz)
Fuse type T4A/250 V
Description Value
Voltage inputs Rated voltage 60...210 V AC
Voltage withstand
• Continuous 240 V AC
• For 10 s 360 V AC
• For 10 s 360 V AC
Description Value 1)
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A
constant L/R <40 ms
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC
1) X100: SO1
X110: SO1, SO2
1) X100: IRF,SO2
X110: SO3, SO4
Table 523: Double-pole power outputs with TCS function X100: PO3 and PO4
Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 5 A/3 A/1 A
constant L/R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC (two
contacts connected in a series)
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC
Trip-circuit monitoring (TCS)
• Control voltage range 20...250 V AC/DC
Table 524: Single-pole power output relays X100: PO1 and PO2
Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 5 A/3 A/1 A
constant L/R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC
1) Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance outside the temperature range of -25...+55 ºC
2) For relays with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is +70 ºC
• Differential mode
2.5 kV
• Air discharge
15 kV
1) For relays with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is +70oC
EN 50263
EN 60255-26
EN 60255-27
EMC council directive 2004/108/EC
EU directive 2002/96/EC/175
IEC 60255
Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC
Section 17 Glossary
AC Alternating current
ACT 1. Application Configuration tool in PCM600
2. Trip status in IEC 61850
CAT 5 A twisted pair cable type designed for high signal integrity
CAT 5e An enhanced version of CAT 5 that adds specifications
for far end crosstalk
CBB Cycle building block
CPU Central processing unit
CT Current transformer
CTS Clear to send
DC 1. Direct current
2. Disconnector
3. Double command
DCD Data carrier detect
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed by
Westronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownership
of the protocol and assumes responsibility for its
evolution.
DPC Double-point control
DSR Data set ready
DT Definite time
DTR Data terminal ready
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EIA-232 Serial communication standard according to Electronics
Industries Association
EIA-485 Serial communication standard according to Electronics
Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
Ethernet A standard for connecting a family of frame-based
computer networking technologies into a LAN
VT Voltage transformer
WAN Wide area network
WHMI Web human-machine interface
www.abb.com/substationautomation